Home

Manual - Test Equipment Depot

1. SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE MAN SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1E3 SOUR LFO FREQ MAN 12 kHz The value entered with command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR LFO FREQ MAN has no effect the command only sets the next sweep step In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single sweep always starts at the start frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR EXT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger 4 94 E 1 R amp S SMC100A LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block Reset Sweep LF Sweep 1411 4060 32 Extern Step Extern Start Stop Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log If a different sweep mode
2. The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as upon the command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is made via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The VISUAL BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet Parallel Poll In a parallel poll the controller uses a single command to request up to eight instruments to transmit one bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable register PPE This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a respo
3. SENS FILT LENG AUTO queries the automatically set filter length Response 1024 Device specific SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth USER 1 65536 The command selects the filter length for user filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE USER As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window a constant filter length results in a constant measurement time Values 1 and 2 n are setable The time window is fixed to 20 ms Example SENS FILT TYPE USER selects user filter mode SENS FILT LENG 16 sets a filter length of 16 The resulting measurement time is 640 ms 2x16x20 ms Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 25 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SENSe POWer FILTer NSRatio 0 0001 1 0 The command defines the noise content for fixed noise filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE SNRation Example SENS FILT TYPE SNR selects fixed noise filter mode for the power sensor SENS FILT NSR 0 2 sets a noise content of 0 2 Device specific SENSe POWer FILTer NSRatio MTIMe 1 0 999 99 s The command defines the timeout for fixed noise filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE SNRation This value ensures limited settling times Example SENS FILT TYPE SNR selects fixed noise filter mode for the power sensor SENS FILT NSR 0 2 sets a noise content of 0 2 SENS FILT NSR MTIM 5 limit
4. ssesssss 4 58 6 23 AMECA i os 9 4 Auto Once Power Sensors 4 55 6 31 B Block data 5 uet e terre 5 17 6 14 Block data not allowed 168 9 5 Boolean parameter sss 5 17 C Cannot access hardware 200 9 18 Cannot access the EEPROM 202 9 18 Cannot open file 460 ssss 9 18 Cannot read file 462 sss 9 18 Cannot write file 461 9 19 Center Freg ios 4 78 6 51 Character data 5 15 Character data not allowed 148 9 5 Character data too long 144 9 5 Characters special 6 2 Check Front Panel 4 16 Check box Held 3 11 Colon separator esses 5 18 Column Separator Import Export User Correction data 4 70 6 45 Comma eeparator 5 18 Command adresse 8 4 description 6 1 lieader i iint pe edens 5 11 MO pH 5 14 parameters IA enone 5 16 QUO cie RV ed 5 15 question mark 5 15 SeQuerce i e it 5 22 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command e 5 11 GENEE ee EA 5 12 synchronization re eae e EEEa 5 22 universal tede era ehe 8 4 Command Error 100 sess 9 5 Command protected 203 9 7 Common Commande seen 6 5 Computer name Setup sssssss 4 18 Connection to external controller
5. 4 33 Manual operation return to 5 3 5 8 Manual remote Control 1 24 Maximal deviation PM nnt 4 91 6 49 PHIM eessen 4 94 6 71 6 72 Menu A ee a 3 11 DA e a 3 10 Missing parameter 109 9 11 Mod Gen bock 2 3 MOD Re 9 1 Mode Level ween 4 82 6 78 6 96 AR cie e 4 101 6 60 LF ween 4 101 6 60 6 63 RF Frequency coocooccccccccnononccnncncninaninas 4 75 6 54 RF Sweep ccccccccnnnnncocononinininononoss 4 75 6 54 6 91 Import Export User Correction data 4 69 6 46 IP Address Setup 4 19 6 111 Modulation AM id ERR HERR ER o 4 88 6 36 FM reae Rut 4 90 6 49 PhiM x rt id 4 93 6 71 Pulse modulation 4 95 6 80 Modulation depth AM 4 89 6 36 Modulation deviation EM Litt d esee 4 91 6 49 6 50 PM A 4 94 6 71 6 72 MOUSE colita tadas 1 20 1411 4060 32 Index N NENE AAA tns 1 21 Network Zeitmge 4 17 No current list G4A1l sess 9 20 No error O ciao poe 9 11 No load voltage EMF 4 61 Number of licences sss 4 13 Numeric data not allowed 1296 9 11 O Operation bourse 4 10 6 12 Option expiration date 4 13 SUNG AA ade 4 12 6 6 Offset Frequency sssssusss 4 45 6 55 Offset Level 4 58 6 75 Out of memory 225 sss 9 12 Output EF etd leat 1 6 4 10
6. 1411 4077 62 2 3 E 1 Example of Setup R amp S SMC100A Info and Help System The R amp S SMC comprises a comprehensive info and help system Context sensitive help can be called any time with the HELP key The help system indicates the currently selected parameter and offers additional services such as cross references index and contents The content of the help system corresponds to the operating manual of the R amp S SMC Warning and conflict messages caused by incorrect operation as well as further information are displayed in the Info line A complete list of existing conflicts is displayed when the INFO key is pressed Additional information on entries can be requested from the help system The history function permits display of all messages Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in chapter 3 Manual Operation Menus and instrument functions are described in detail in chapter 4 nstrument Functions Example of Setup A central element of the R amp S SMC display is the block diagram that illustrates the signal flow Each block represents a section of signal generation The main settings of a block are indicated in the block The interconnection of active inputs and outputs is also shown The user is thus always informed about the connection of inputs and outputs in the signal flow and where they can be configured A window is opened for each menu where parameters can
7. SYST COMM NETW RES Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR SYST COMM USB RES Response USB 54 000000 INSTR Switches the instrument to operate in local control mode Switching from remote to local control mode can be also done with one of the following actions manually with the LOCAL key on the front panel with the interface command amp GTL via the remote control interface with the key combination CTRL Q Remote control command n a Protection Setup Protection The Protection menu provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only To deactivate the protection the correct password has to be entered After the instrument has been switched on the protection levels 1 to 5 are automatically activated Protection Level 1 can be deactivated to expand the functionality of the internal adjustment to change the host name and to access the self tests see service manual The password is 123456 Prot Level2 Y On PWD Prot Level3 Y On PWD Prot Level 4 Y On PWD Prot Level 5 Y On PWD Prot Level 1 Y On Remote control command SYST PROT1 STAT ON SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 1411 4060 32 123456 4 21 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Security Setup Protection The Security menu provides access to the passwords and mass storage security settings It is opened using t
8. Indicates the type of the connected R amp S NRP power sensor The sensor type is automatically detected Remote control command SENS POW TYPE 4 47 E 4 Power Viewer State Power Sensors Level Power Sensors Unit Power Sensors Show Level Permanent Power Sensors 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Activates deactivates level measurement by the power sensor Remote control command INIT POW CONT OFF ON The local state is set with the INIT command Switching the local state off enhances the measurement performance In remote control the sensors are set up using the SENSe commands The remote measurement is triggered by the READ query which also provides the measurement results The state is not influenced by these commands measurements results can be retrieved with local State on or off SENS POW FILT TYPE USER SENS POW FILT LENG USER 16 READ POW Indicates the measured level value with the selected unit Remote control command READ POW Selects the unit used for result display The power sensor provides the measured value in Watt In which unit the measured value is indicated is selected here and might be Watt dBm or dBuV Remote control command SENS UNIT POW DBM Activates the permanent indication of the power measurement result in the upper right corner of the block diagram For each sensor the type of sensor the connector the meas
9. TTestease Resun Selftest Performs the selftest The Testcase Result window lists the tested diagnostic points as well as the test results either succeeded PASSED or failed FAILED Remote control command n a 1411 4060 32 4 13 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Test Point Setup Test The Test Point menu provides access to the test points available in the instrument Test Point is a protected procedure which can be accessed if protection level 1 is disabled The protection dialog is called in the setup menu see Protection Setup Protection page 4 21 When activated the voltage of the selected test point is measured and displayed A detailed description of the test points can be found in Chapter 3 of the Service Manual which is supplied with the instrument The Test Point menu under System is opened using the SETUP key Select Test Point DIAG SMC BAB P3V3 Voltage 3 26915 State Test Point Activates the measurement of the voltage at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG1 MEAS POIN DIAG NO DP Response 2 Select Test Point Calls the submenu for selecting the test point The currently selected key is shown next to the key recent data sets DIAG SMC BAB P7V DIAG SMC BAB P5V DIAG SMC BAB P12V DIAG SMC BAB PO0V9 DIAG_SMC_BAB_P28V DIAG_SMC RAR P2V z Remote control commands DIAG1 POIN CAT Command list
10. 9 16 External digital modulation signal AM rst et tit sem etu m etd 4 88 EM o ient 4 90 6 50 PRIM zz itta teu 4 93 6 72 E E EE EE irte 6 84 Voltage i eet Hee i 4 87 External Reference Frequency 4 49 6 86 External tuning Reference frequency 4 48 F Factory Preset ia 4 32 Features of R amp S SMC suus 2 1 File contains invalid data 465 9 19 File list is eias 4 29 4 38 6 18 File menu 4 27 4 36 File type selection 4 31 4 40 Filename missing 463 ssss 9 19 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Filter Power Sensors 4 54 Filter Length Power Sensors 4 55 6 29 6 31 6 32 Fine adjustment Reference feguenck 4 49 6 86 Firmware Update 3 Riven wren den 1 12 VEISION TE 4 13 6 6 Flash memory AA 1 20 FM Deviation aeh 4 91 6 49 6 50 DG mode ida 4 48 4 92 6 36 External Coupling 4 92 6 49 Frequency sss 4 93 6 58 Sensitivity sss 4 92 6 50 eeler 4 91 6 50 Slate iet e e es 4 91 6 50 FM PhiM Modulator adjustment 6 8 FREQ OFFSET aa a eia 9 1 Frequency SM ele i el Son ins 4 90 6 58 display eet Reeg 3 6 FEM uus eto acute 4 93 6 58 LF goenerator 4 107 6 58 A sert ERE ed 4 45 6 55 PM ore ale 4 95 6 58 PM rete eee 4 97 6 83 Power Sensors 4 54 RF output sigma 4 43 6 53 RF SWe6p e ies 4 78 6 5
11. 1 24 Controller external cesses 1 24 Copy instrument settings 4 31 4 40 6 19 OO ui ere e e ded 4 10 6 12 Coupling mode AM EXT aibi dps 4 89 6 36 FM PM EXT 4 92 4 94 MOD ENT 6 49 6 71 Create New Directory coooooocicccccnnnicnccoo 4 32 4 41 Lross overbRblAbcable 1 22 Current Freq LP SWCD aiii ria idas 4 104 6 60 RF SWeGD z oia eter ae 4 78 6 54 Current L vel idees 4 85 6 76 Ct ite A a 4 31 4 40 D Data evchauge s isirisisturia ernn riiiiri iarainn 1 20 Data format block ET 6 14 query command sese 6 14 Data out of range 222 sssusss 9 7 Data type error 703 9 7 Date Getunp 4 16 6 113 DC coupling external EM 4 92 DOLLAR 5 19 Decimal gooimt nan nneennnnna 5 16 Decimal Point Import Export User Correction data 4 70 6 45 1411 4060 32 10 11 Index Default factory Setting 6 113 instrument settings 1 18 4 6 6 116 Delete instrument settings 4 32 4 40 6 21 Delito 5 19 Delta Phase iii la 4 47 6 70 Destination Import Export User Correction data 4 70 6 47 Device specific error 300 9 7 DHGP iue 1 22 Digital modulation signal FM 0 0000000 4 90 Directory 4 29 4 38 6 19 Display it reed etta 3 5 DNS Server Address Auto Setup 4 20 6 108 Double dagger 7 5 18 Double Pulse B Y p i
12. NOTICE 7 LF output C ir RF See data sheet Output for RF signal and chapter 4 section RF Signal Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the RF output The maximum permissible back feed is specified in the data sheet LF Output for internal modulation generator signal 8 Input for external AM FM PhiM signals 1411 4077 62 MOD EXT Input for external modulation signals 1 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Legend for Front Panel View 9 Keypad for data entry ESC DIAGR CLOSE MOD RF ON OFF ON OFF DIAGR Brings the block diagram to the foreground Active menus are minimized ESC CLOSE Calls the next higher selection level This opens up the following functions Closes the active menu if the cursor is in the top level menu parameter selection Switches between different entry fields of a menu Quits the editing mode and restores the previous value This function is only available in the editing mode i e only before an entry is confirmed or selected with Enter Cancels queries in message windows Shifts the entry cursor from the frequency or level display to the previously active menu or to the previously highlighted block in the block diagram if no menu is active MOD ON OFF Switches the active modulations on and off RF ON OFF Switches the RF signal on and off 10 Standby ON OFFswitch Sa e CAUTION 1411 4077 62 The on off switch switches the
13. If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been modified the new entries will be used An error message appears if an attempt is made to access a non existing list or to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument Remote control command MEMM LOAD STAT 2 var user testfile savrcl RCL 2 Recall Immediate x Loads the selected configuration from one of the three intermediate memories If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used A message appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory Remote control command RCL 1 File Management File The File Management menu provides all the functions required for file management Directories can be created and files copied deleted and moved between the directories on the devices internal flash memory and memory stick All Files ucorhigh uco y Create New Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete a File Type Selects the file types to be indicated If a file type with a specific file extension Isw is selected only files with this
14. NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control In the top section of the menu the RF sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the RF sweep all sweep modes or to execute the RF sweep Single mode Mode Auto y Reset Sweep Start Freq 100 000 000 000 MHz gt Stop Freq 500 000 000 000 MHz gt Center Freq 300 000 000 000 MHz gt Span 400 000 000 000 MHz gt Current Freq 384 000 000 000 MHz Spacing Linear y Shape Sawtooth gt Step Lin 1 000 000 000 MHz gt Dwell Time 10 0 ms gt The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section The sweep range of the RF sweep can be entered in two ways either by entering the Start and Stop value or by entering the Center and Span The two sets of parameters influence each other in the following way Start Center Span 2 Stop Center Span 2 Center Start Stop 2 Span Stop Start 1411 4060 32 4 67 E 4 Sweep Mode R amp S SMC100A State RF Frequency Activates deactivates RF sweep mode SWEEP Note Activating the RF frequency sweep automatically deactivates the LF sweep and Level sweep Remote control commands SOUR FR EQ MODE SWE SOUR FR EQ MODE CW Mode RF Frequency Selects the Sweep instrument operating mode and the Sweep mode Sweep Auto Single 14
15. POSitive Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 70 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATe POLarity NORMal INVerted Selects the polarity of the Gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG EXT GAT POL NORM The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high NORMal Device specific SOURce PULM TRIGger MODE AUTO EXTernal EGATe The command selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation Parameters AUTO The pulse modulation is generated continuously EXTernal The pulse modulation is triggered by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector EGATe The pulse modulation is gated by an external gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG MODE EXT selects triggering by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Compliant SOURce PULM WIDTh 20ns 1s The command sets the width of the generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period Example PULM WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the pulse Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 71 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency No
16. The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA POW POIN queries the number of level values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 level values SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA SENSor POWer SONCe The command activates the filling of the user correction list with level values acquired by the power sensor The command activates the filling of the user correction list with level values acquired by the selected power sensor All level correction values for the given frequency values are entered in the selected list The command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query Example CORR CSET DATA SENS POW SONC fills the user correction list with level values acquired by the power sensor Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 35 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce CORRection CSET DELete lt table name gt The command deletes the specified table The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR The command is an event and therefore has no RST value The numerical suffix under SOURce is irrelevant Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor selects the directory for the user correction files
17. 1411 4060 32 9 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Suffix too long 134 The suffix contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Syntax error 102 The command is invalid Example The command contains block data the instrument does not accept SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register System error 310 This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform the R amp S Service SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Too many digits 124 The decimal numeric data element contains too many digits SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Too much data 223 More data were sent by the host than the signal generator can handle SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Undefined header 113 The sent command header has not been defined Example Header XYZ is undefined for every instrument SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 11 E 1 Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages The following list contains all error messages specific of the instrument in alphabetical order The positive error codes mark the errors specific of the instrument The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the
18. CORR CSET DEL UCOR1 deletes the table ucor1 Device specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFlLe CATalog The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export import of user correction data The individual files are separated by commas The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMor y CDTR The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXC AFIL CAT queries the available files with extension txt Response ucorl ucor2 the ASCII files ucor1 txt and ucor2 txt are available Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 36 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFlLe EXTension TXT CSV The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXC AFIL CAT queries the availabl
19. The command triggers voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured voltage A description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument A list of the available test points can be queried using the DIAG POIN CAT command Example DIAG POIN DIAG SMC BAB P7V triggers measurement at the test point DIAG SMC BAB DIV Response 0 5 the voltage at the test point is 0 5 volt Device specific DISPlay Subsystem The DISPlay system contains the commands to set the power save mode of the instrument Command Parameters Default unit DISPlay PSAVe STATe ON OFF O IE DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 1 60 This command sets the wait time for the screen save mode of the display The available value range is 1 to 60 minutes the resolution 1 minute The entry is dimensionless Example DISP PSAV HOLD 10 sets the wait for the screen saver mode to 10 minutes Device specific DISPlay PSAVe STATe ON OFF This command activates deactivates the screen save mode of the display With the screen save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the wait time see command DISPlay PSAVe HOLDo when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboard are made This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument
20. A user defined adjustment value is used The value is entered under Adjustment DAC Value This allows the frequency to be impaired freely for example to simulate a frequency error The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the calibration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment state to OFF Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT ON Enters a user defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency This value is not used unless Adjustment Active On is selected Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ VAL 1400 4 45 E 4 Power Viewer R amp S SMC100A Power Viewer R amp S NRP power sensors can be connected via the USB interfaces front and rear panel requires USB adapter R amp S NRP Z3 or R amp S NRP Z4 The connected R amp S NRP power sensor is automatically detected and indicated in the NRP Z Power Viewer menu The average signal power is continuously measured by the R amp S NRP power sensor and indicated in the Power Sensors menu NRP Z Power Viewer Permanent display of the measurement results in the block diagram can be activated The output signals of the RF signal path reference level is the set RF level or any freely selectable source can be measured The signal generator supports the use of R amp S NRP power sensors for the acquisition of level correction data The acquired level correction data is used to create
21. AM 30PCT Set AM modulation depth 3096 CALL IBWRT generator AM STAT ON Switch on AM 3 An amplitude modulated signal is now applied at the RF output of the instrument 4 To return to manual control press the LOCAL key at the front panel Switchover to Remote Control On power on the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be operated via the front panel controls or via mouse and external keyboard In case of remote control via the IEC IEEE bus the instrument is set to remote control REMOTE status by means of an addressed command With remote control via Ethernet remote control is not automatically set by means of a command The instrument must be explicitly set to the REMOTE state e g by sending the interface command amp GTR go to remote In the REMOTE state instrument control from the front panel or via mouse and keyboard is disabled Menus can be opened however e g to verify settings Buttons and setting fields are displayed in gray and cannot be activated REMOTE is displayed in the status line The instrument remains in the REMOTE mode until local control is selected either manually with the LOCAL key on the front panel or with the interface command amp GTL via the remote control interface Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument settings In the remote control mode the front panel
22. Ext Trigger Input Slope Negative y Polarity M Pulse Source External only Modulation Selects the polarity of the external modulation signal Normal The RF level is On if the level is High at the modulation input Remote control command SOUR PULM POL NORM Inverse The RF level is off if the level is High at the modulation input Remote control command SOUR PULM POL INV 1411 4060 32 4 89 E 4 Pulse Modulation Pulse Mode Pulse Generator Pulse Period Pulse Generator Pulse Width Pulse Generator Pulse Delay Pulse Generator Double Pulse Width Pulse Generator Double Pulse Delay Pulse Generator 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Source Pulse Generator only Selects and activates the pulse mode Single A single pulse is generated in one pulse period Remote control command SOUR PULM MODE SING Double Two pulses are generated in one pulse period Additional settings for the double pulse are available in the menu Remote control command SOUR PULM MODE DOUB Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Remote control command SOUR PULM PER 0 05ms Pulse width Sets the width of the generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period Remote control command SOUR PULM WIDT 22ms External trigger only Sets the pulse delay The pulse
23. The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted CTI CT TT CT SOURGEIFMEDEV menger A SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC DC O S E EE TN E f 1 CI E O ES ET oor A Jooo o SOURce FM DEViation 0 Hz 20 MHz The command sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Example FM 5E3 sets the FM modulation deviation to 5 kHz See data sheet Compliant SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling modefor the external modulation input MOD EXT in the case of frequency modulation Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT can be set independently for all modulations Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example FM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external frequency modulation Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 42 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce FM EXTernal DEViation 0 40 MHz The command enters the deviation of the external FM signal Example FM EXT DEV 3kHz sets an external modulation depth of 3 kHz Compliant SOURce FM SENSitivity The command queries the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in Hz V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR FM
24. lt path gt This command reads out the number of subdirectories in the specified directory If no directory is specified the directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out Example MMEM DCAT LENG reads out the number of subdirectories in the current directory Response 3 there are 3 subdirectories in the current directory SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 17 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A MMEMory DELete lt file_name gt This command deletes the specified file The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM DEL var rs_gen TEST1 SAVRCL deletes the file Test1 savrcl in the USER directory on the internal flash memory MMEMory LOAD STATe 4 file name This command loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory The instrument setting must be activated using an RCL command with the number used after the file has been loaded see the section Common Commands page 6 4 Example SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 VAR USER test4 savrcl stores the instrument setting stored with the SAV command under memory number 4 in the file test1 ss in the USER directory on the internal flash memory MMEM LOAD STAT 4 VAR USER test4 savrcl loads the file Test4 savrcl inthe USER directory of the int
25. nx The two characters and function as wildcards i e they are used for selecting several files The character represents exactly one character while the character represents all characters up to the end of the file name therefore stands for all the files in a directory When used in conjunction with the commands the parameter file name is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path or only the file name The file name must include the file extension The same applies for the parameters directory name and path Depending on how much information is provided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path setting in the commands Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file they have to be stored in an intermediate memory using common command SAV number The specified number is subsequently used in the MMEM STOR STATe number file command Also subsequently to loading a file with instrument settings with command MMEM LOAD STAT number lt file gt these settings have to be activated with the common command RCL number In the example below the current instrument setting is always stored in the file test1 ss in the directory user on the internal flash memory SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 var rs gen testl savrcl If the co
26. 0 the protective circuit has not tripped Response 1 the protective circuit has tripped Compliant OUTPut STATe ON OFF This command activates and deactivates the RF output Example OUTP OFF deactivates the RF output Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 22 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description OUTPut STATe PON OFF UNCHanged This command selects the state which the RF output assumes when the instrument is switched on The command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Parameters OFF The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on UNCHanged When the instrument is switched on the output remains in the same state as it was when the instrument was switched off Example OUTP PON OFF The RF output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Device specific SENSe INITiate and READ Subsystem The SENSe subsystem contains the commands for configuring the power measurements with a R amp S NRP power sensor connected to the generator The measurement is started and the measurement result retrieved with the READ command The description of this commands is included in the following Command Parameters Default unit II foo A CS CI A A TT SENSO POMO CORRcionSPOaiceSTATe onor J SENS POMO DISPO PERManeneSTAre oo oo o o eege J fomm eegenen geg pia OOO O ooo ENT AT o EE s 1 sewssrOWe rTesONGe A EE sewss
27. 1411 4077 62 1 19 E 1 Remote Access via an External Controller R amp S SMC100A Remote Access via an External Controller The R amp S SMC can be remote accessed from an external PC via a network link This allows convenient operation of the signal generator from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else Remote access in contrast to remote control does not use remote control commands but the regular user interface displayed using separate software which is installed on the external PC The instrument can thus be manually operated from the PC as on the unit itself Preconditions for remote access are a connection between signal generator and PC via a LAN network and the installation of the VNC client software on the PC and on the R amp S SMC The VNC client software for setting up the connection is included in the Linux Unix operating system per default For Windows operating system the free of charge software Ultr VNC is provided on the R amp S SMC CD ROM VNC client programms for other operating systems are available free of charge on the internet After the connection is established the signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed on the external PC and the R amp S SMC can be manually remote accessed from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard or a front
28. 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Send the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished 1411 4060 32 5 22 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Event Status Register ESE 1 Setthe OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence lt short timeout gt OPC A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 3 Reset timeout to former value 4 Clear the error queue with SYStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrupted entries Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores information on errors which have occurred This information is stored in theerror queue
29. Click the entry field and enter value Activates the block diagram Press DIAGR key Press CTRL D Click the function block Activates the Winbar Press softkey Press CTRL F1 F8 Press CTRL W Click button in Winbar Calls the Setup or File menu or the menu tree Press SETUP key Press CTRL S Setup or CTRL M menu tree Selecting a Control Element Setting Parameters Control elements are always selected in the same way no matter whether a function block in the diagram a menu in the menu tree a parameter in the menu or an entry in a list or table is concerned e Anelement is activated by means of the cursor An active element is highlighted by a blue frame Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Selects an element Select element by means of the rotary knob or the arrow keys Select element by means of the arrow keys Click element Switching Parameters ON OFF Setting Parameters A parameter can be activated and deactivated using a button or a check box The ENTER function of the different control media switches the highlighted element on or off toggle function Colour and label of a button change the check box is ticked or the tick is removed E Wm Adjustment Active Vv Adjustment Active L Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Switches on off Press rotary knob EN
30. Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR SING SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW EXEC 1411 4060 32 4 77 E 4 Sweep Mode R amp S SMC100A The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section Start Level RF Level Sweep Stop Level RF Level Sweep Current Level RF Level Sweep Shape RF Level Sweep 1411 4060 32 Sets the start level Remote control command SOUR POW STAR 100 Sets the stop level Remote control command SOUR POW STOP 10 Displays the current level If Step is set the level for the next level step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR POW MAN 30 Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence shape Sawtooth One sweep runs from the start level to the stop level The subsequent sweep starts at the start level again i e the shape of sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth Remote control command SOUR SWE POW SHAP SAWT Triangle One sweep runs from start to stop level and back i e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start level again Remote control command SOUR SWE POW SHAP TRI 4 78 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Step RF Level Sweep Dwell Time RF Level Sweep Ext Trigger Input Slope 1411 4060 32 Sweep Mode Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes
31. SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 95 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem KLOCk ON OFF The command Keyboard LOCk disables the front panel keyboard of the R amp S Signal Generator including the LOCAL key or enables it again OFF Example SYST KLOC ON activates the keyboard lock The keyboard cannot be operated again until it has been enabled with SYST KLOC OFF SCPI Compliant SYSTem Language SYSTem LANGuage The command queries the remote control command set The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST LANG Response SCPI the SCPI command set is used SCPI Device specific SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the PRESET key on the front panel and the RST command The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST PRES all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to their default values SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 96 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SYSTem PROTect lt n gt STATe ON OFF password The command activates and deactivates the specified protection level There are several protection levels which disable specific service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only These levels are identified by the suffix under PROTect The respe
32. SQURcCe POWer MANUal ii ii hi acie dE dk ee e DE ii dde rone EORR iii 6 76 SOURcCe POWer MODE ota ben sm e e prp t tie heec cout buy e elegan e e 6 78 ISOURce POWOerSTARE cip cin Tb etu eto vere hebes hia 6 78 SOURce POWer STEP INCRement sss esent eene nent nennen na 6 79 Lelleg ER lee 6 79 Kielen ET 6 79 SOURCEJPULM DEL ay tigi E b i t ade ea oA 6 81 SOURce PULM DOUBle DELay sssssssisies eene nnns nennt nennen nennen 6 81 SOURce JPULM DOUBle STA TO oia muni unde en 6 81 SOURce PULM DOUBle WIDTH cre 6 81 SOURGE PULM MODE 2 reso tio t n D e pe A Ene iene ou qu b en tee d 6 83 SOURce JPUEM PERIOd snc is m tb ut a P RE RR TERR a 6 83 SQURce P EM POkLarily 1 on ted t tr dtr C ia eia del ar e ede e Ea dag 6 83 SOURce IP EM SQURGe iii iari a cere He p PER atio cue tee pe uds 6 84 SOURce E i disp e ERR e te Diet 6 84 L OUlf ce DU M TRiGoer ENfemalGAtebOl at 6 85 SOURce PULM TRiIGger EXTernal SL OPe sss sisse nnne 6 84 ISQURce IPULM TRIGger MODE sico fen eee i alias a eU e be 6 85 SOURCE PULM WIDTH ost eaten ee At id Ue ee e Eea 6 85 SOURce JROSCillator INTernal ADJUSt S TATe sse 6 86 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJUSt VALue esses sss 6 88 SOURce ROSC illator EXTernal FREQuency sss sienne 6 86 SOURce IROSCillalor SOURC6 spat i be HR a HR CH PLE E a E o aene 6 88 SOURce
33. The LF Sweep mode is activated in the LF Sweep menu RF frequency and level sweeps are activated in the respective menus of the RF block The internal pulse gnenerator enables the generation of single and double pulse signals The generator is activated and configured in the Pulse Generator menu of the LF output block or in the Pulse Modulation menu of the Mod block Pulse Generator is selected as Source LF Frequency Sweep Menu The LF Frequency Sweep menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the SETUP key under LF Gen LF Output Pulse Gen In the top section the LF Sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the LF sweep all sweep modes or to execute the LF sweep Single mode Reset Sweep Start Freq 1 0000 kHz gt Stop Freq 50 000 0 kHz gt Current Freq 14 0000 kHz Spacing Linear J Shape Sawtooth Step Lin 10000 kHz gt Dwell Time 10 0 ms gt 1411 4060 32 4 92 E 1 R amp S SMC100A LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section State LF Sweep Mode LF Sweep 1411 4060 32 Activates LF Sweep mode Note Activating the LF sweep automatically deactivates the RF frequency sweep and level sweep Remote control commands SOUR SOUR FO FR EO MODE SWE FO FR EQ MODE CW Selects the Sw
34. active before the last switch off are established unless another start setting has explicitly been selected in the File menu Note If the software stops unexpectedly the instrument can be shut down by pressing the STANDBY key for approx 5 s Switching Off O CH 1 Press the ON STANDBY switch on the front panel The R amp S SMC stores the current setting before it shuts down the Linux operating system Then the AC supply is switched to the STANDBY mode 2 Only the AC supply is powered 3 The yellow LED must be on CAUTION Danger of shock hazard The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode 1 Press the main power switch on the rear of the instrument to position 0 None of the front panel LEDs should be on Note It is recommended to switch the instrument to STANDBY mode before completely disconnecting it from the AC supply If the power switch is set to 0 before the instrument is switched to the standby mode all current settings are lost 1411 4077 62 1 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Function Check Power Fuses The R amp S SMC is fully fused by two fuses IEC127 T3 15H 250 V The fuses are accommodated in the fuse holders next to the power connector Use only fuses of the mentioned type CAUTION Shock hazard For fuse replacement ensure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected from the power supply Prior to fuse replacement disconnect the power cord from the R amp
35. detected and the user correction list contains at least one frequency value Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET DATA SENS POW SONC 1411 4060 32 4 65 E 4 Sweep Mode R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode The R8S SMC Signal Generator offers three different sweep types frequency sweep level sweep and LF sweep to be activated alternatively Each type has 6 modes which differ with respect to the sweep cycle mode continuous individual and step by step and triggering mode automatic internal and external The LF sweep is activated and configured in the Mod Gen block A sweep is set in five basic steps which are shown below taking a frequency sweep as an example 1 Set the sweep range Start Freq and Stop Freq or Center Freq and Span 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Spacing 3 Set the step width Step Lin Log and dwell time Dwell Time 4 Activate the sweep Mode to Auto Single Step or Extern Single Extern Step 5 Trigger the sweep except for Auto mode Execute Single Sweep Current Frequency or External Trigger Signal Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update Setup menu for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times 1411 4060 32 4 66 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode Frequency Sweep Menu The Frequency Sweep menu is opened in the RF function block or in the menu tree of the SETUP key under RF Signal Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator
36. see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Symbols and safety labels Ba A A A a Z Observe Weight Danger of Warning Attention product indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground E Electrostatic documentation units gt 18 kg shock surface sensitive devices O D o wA NS lal n iH Standby E Alternating Direct alternating Pa e ON OFF indication DC current AC current DC AC insulation Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the wo
37. 0 H12345678 TEST DIR SSYN 0 Response H12345678 Device specific TRIGger Subsystem The TRIGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the RF and LF sweep The trigger input connector is configured in the SOURce INPut subsystem The trigger system of the R amp S Signal Generator is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system The TRIGger system differs from the SCPI system as follows e No INITiate command the instrument behaves as if INITiate CONTinuous ON were set e Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist Other commands associated with the trigger system of the R amp S Signal Generator can be found in the modulation and RF signal subsystems 1411 4060 32 6 99 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A Command Parameters Default unit TRIGger LFFSweep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle EXTernal EAUTo TRIGger FSWeep IMMediate AUTO IMMediate SINGle EXTernal EAUTo AUTOJIMMediate SINGle EXTernal EAUTo AUTO IMMediate SINGIe BUS EXTernal TRIGger LFFSWeep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe BUS EXTernal Both commands set the trigger source for the LF sweep alias commands The trigger is triggered by the command SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the ins
38. 1 BICI 3 4 Frequency and Level Setting Display seeeeeese 3 5 Status Information and Messages Dieplay sess 3 5 Info Window Display mmn 3 6 Block Diagram Display se 3 8 Menu Structure Dieplaw e 3 9 Setting Parameters eese essen eene emen enne assets 3 11 Calling a Menu Setting Parameters n 3 11 Selecting a Control Element Setting Parameters 3 12 Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters 3 13 Entering a Value Setting Parameters sess 3 14 Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeerreeeeereenen 3 15 Selecting a Value from a List Setting Parameters 3 16 Terminating Entries Setting Parameters aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 16 Restoring the Previous Value Setting Parameters 3 17 Menu Operation teh dao enden 3 18 Biel 3 19 Be Gr EE 3 19 Help System diii piedi de e eva ed hd eet ee at 3 20 File Management x3 15 ei a ier nee a eg 3 22 File Select Menu imo n n es 3 23 File Manager nda et eee rie i re ron 3 24 ReMote ACCESS n iei Ie pee b d e hd Le ED te fad La pte 3 25 Legend of Front Panel Controls sssseee 3 26 Front Panel Key Emulaton non eene 3 27 1411 4077 62 Il 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Manual Operation A Manual Operation Introduction
39. 1 16 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Linux Operating System Linux Operating System NOTICE Possible impairment of the functioning of the instrument The instrument is equipped with the Linux operating system It is thus possible to install COTS software in the instrument The use and installation of commercial off the shelf COTS software may impair the instrument function For this reason we recommend that you only execute programs tested by Rohde amp Schwarz with regard to their compatibility with the instrument software The drivers and programs used in the instrument under Linux have been adapted to the test instrument Existing instrument software must only be modified with update software released by Rohde amp Schwarz The signal generator is equipped with the Linux operating system please note the statement at the back of the title page The configuration of the operating system is optimally adapted to signal generator functions in the factory Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like keyboard are installed or in the event that the network configuration does not comply with the default settings see sections Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN After power up of the signal generator the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automatically The operating system cannot be accessed All necessary system settings can be made in the Setup menu The R amp S SMC provides an internal fl
40. 1411 4060 32 6 91 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STATic AUTO The command selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Parameters AUTO The IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function STATic The IP address is assigned manually P2P A Peer to Peer connection is used Example SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE AUTO the IP address is assigned automatically DHCP SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET ON activates DHCP SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SET The command activates the IP settings Commands SYST COMM NETW IPAD The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP adress settings SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 0 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF The command enters the Subnet mask The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Example SYST COMM NETW SUBN MASK 255 255 255 0 enters the Subnet mask SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 92 E 1 R amp S SM
41. 19 464 Invalid filename extension 9 20 465 File contains invalid data 9 19 E 1 Index R amp S SMC100A 5 50 Extern reference out of range or dreconneched 9 16 A Abort b tton ca 3 17 Aborting a calculation ssusss 3 17 Accept Network Settings 4 17 AC coupling external FM 4 92 Adjust All siio og i A oa 4 9 6 8 FM offset upra eee 4 92 6 10 FM PhiM Modulator aaaeaii 6 8 EVO leccion ect 6 10 A ne 4 9 6 8 Adjustment Le 4 49 6 86 Md ac n 4 10 6 10 data invalid 183 9 16 data missing 182 suus 9 17 failed 180 oer 9 18 Tr quency estin geri 4 50 6 88 value Reference frequency 4 50 6 88 ALC automatic level control 4 61 6 73 AULO eiut io e o ao o m 9 2 EE 9 2 On uiae a EHI 4 61 SOH iie ai 9 2 Alternate DNS Server Address Setup 6 106 AM D pih tbe 4 89 6 36 EXT Coupimg oa 4 89 6 36 Frequency sssssssseee eene 4 90 6 58 Sensitivity AA 4 89 6 37 ee 4 89 6 37 NM nah 4 89 6 37 Applications of R amp S SMC 2 1 Architecture of R amp S SMC usss 2 1 1411 4060 32 10 10 AITOW KOYS A ternera tatnen nni 1 5 Assemblies display 4 10 6 11 6 12 Asterisk eio o ER e repe er dn 5 18 Attenuator csse 4 58 6 23 Attenuator Mode
42. 2 4 8 Unit Keys usnm e eee 1 4 IM solatii epi 1 4 Keyboard i ege 1 20 L LAN 2 sitom udis 1 21 5 4 8 5 Interface vibes depende 8 5 Remote Control 5 4 1411 4060 32 10 14 R amp S SMC100A Level Power Sensors 4 52 RF OUtDUt ees 4 58 6 74 Step Width smni ii 4 59 6 79 Uninterrupted setting 4 58 6 23 Unbiased 4 56 adjustment seen 6 10 GOnlrol EE 4 61 6 73 display eire tke kn deis 3 6 display EMP iaa 4 61 WOM E 4 58 6 76 OSes anaa a 4 58 6 75 9 2 Offset Power Sensors 4 54 SWCCD iii 4 81 6 78 9 2 User correchon esses 4 64 6 39 LF Gen Frequency 4 90 4 107 6 58 Gen Voltage 4 107 6 68 CITA 4 100 6 57 QUIDUt 5e tute ici tede 4 100 6 57 Output siate 4 107 6 61 SWCCD iia 4 104 6 61 9 2 Licence for software option 4 13 Limit EE 4 58 6 76 LINUXCACCESS uid RR E 1 20 Linux controller eessssesse 1 24 Lists not same length 226 9 11 Load instrument settings 4 29 4 38 6 6 6 21 Local Remote Channel Control 4 22 EOCAL KEY iiit teu 4 33 5 3 5 8 Local to remote switchover 5 2 Lock Keyboard 6 116 LOWOF Case cde ee Deo 6 2 Lower case commands 5 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A M MAC Address Setup 4 18 6 112 Maintenance esses 8 1 Mantis Vii 5 16 Manual control switch over
43. 32 Storing and Loading Instrument Data Selects the directory in which the file is to be stored The window opposite lists all settings files in this directory A new directory can be created in the File Manager File Manager button Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user The path can also be entered when the file is stored Displays the files which are in the selected directory If a file is highlighted it is overwritten when the file is stored Remote control command MMEM CAT Enters the file name of the file without file extension This file is then created Remote control command n a The file name is entered when the file is stored Stores the current instrument settings under the specified path Remote control command SAV 1 MEMM STOR STAT 1 var user testfile savrcl Stores the current instrument setting in one of the three intermediate memories These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the intermediate memory When the instrument is switched off the contents of the intermediate memories are retained Remote control command SAV 1 Calls the File Management menu Directories can be created and files managed in this menu see the section File Management File page 4 29 Remote control command n a 4 35 E 4 Storing and Loading Instrument Data R amp S SMC100A Loading Instrument Settings File If Recall is select
44. 4 15 6 119 Selection field sss 3 10 Self test sees 4 14 4 22 6 7 6 119 Result O 4 14 TOSICASC unii o op vo mH 4 14 failed 330 cesta tat 9 14 Semicolon Leeparator 5 18 Sensor Power Sensors 4 51 Serial DUS r EROR 4 10 RUMD F ER p e ia 6 6 NUMDGIS used d 4 10 DOll 2 cto tbe iia 5 28 Service request SRQ 5 28 6 7 Setting Parameters sssssusss 3 12 Settings conflict 221 ssss 9 14 SOLU voici i pe RE adidas 4 8 Shape EF SWweep unge 4 105 6 64 RF Level Suween 4 85 6 97 RF Sweenp niseni naene eiea 4 79 6 92 Short CUIS ici 3 27 Show level permanent Power Sensors ees 4 52 6 29 S E 5 16 Slope Instrument trigger input 4 86 4 106 6 57 Pulse trigger input 4 99 6 84 Software options eusse 4 12 6 6 E 1 Index Source AM Ee 4 89 6 37 EM a 4 91 6 50 Import Export User Correction data 4 70 6 47 Level Sweep Trigger 4 82 6 122 LF Sweep Trigger 4 101 6 120 PRIM 5n nb uni in Dip 4 93 Power Sensors 4 53 6 33 Pulse Modulation 4 96 6 84 Reference Oscillator 4 49 6 88 RF Sweep Trigger 4 75 6 121 Spacing Level Sweep n 4 86 6 97 LF SW6ep iie 4 104 6 66 RF SW66pD cues 4 7
45. 7 o o o 2 D 2 Q o 3 3 D 2 a a o kel a o amp 2 c O o 3 D Command Parameters SOURce PGEN STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM DELay 20ns 1s SOURce PULM DOUBle DELay 20ns 1s SOURce PULM DOUBle STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM DOUBle WIDTh 20ns 1s SOURce PULM MODE SOURce PULM PERiod SOURce PULM POLarity DOUBle SINGle 5us 85 s 100ns 85s NORMal INVerted SOURce PULM SOURce INT EXT SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe POSitive NEGative SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce PULM TRIGger MODE AUTO EXTernal EGATe SOURce PULM WIDTh 20ns 1s o O c A o o Er 2 m o o o z O TI T The command switches ON OFF the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument Example PGEN STAT OFF deactivates output of video sync signal 1411 4060 32 6 67 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce PULM DELay 20ns 1s The command sets the pulse delay The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Example PULM DEL 13 us 13 us elapse after a trigger before the first pulse is generated Device specific SOURce PULM DOUBle DELay 20ns 1s The command sets the delay from the start of the first pul
46. 97 6 83 Pulse modulation 4 95 6 80 repetition frequency 4 97 6 58 6 83 Pulse Deriod 4 97 6 83 Pulse trigger input slope 20210200 4 99 6 84 Pulse wich 4 98 6 85 Q QUery A asides ier ads 5 10 responses esto en 5 15 deadlocked 430 ssssssss 9 14 interrupted 410 sss 9 13 unterminated 420 sss 9 13 1411 4060 32 10 16 R amp S SMC100A QUGSIIOH it dei ducts 5 18 Queue overflow 2801 9 13 Quotation marks nen 5 18 R Rear panel eee 1 8 AC S pply oi e ertet nes 1 9 FEUSOSZ ctii Ee 1 9 IEC IEEE bus Interface 1 10 INST TRIG input 1 10 LAN Imierface 1 11 OOO iii 1 11 Power switch sssssseee 1 9 PULSE EXT input 1 10 PULSE VIDEO output 1 10 REF IN MDU za earra e aae n 1 10 REF OUT out 1 10 Reference oscilator 1 11 USB interface type A 1 11 USB interface type P 1 11 Recall instrument settings 4 29 4 30 4 38 4 39 6 6 6 21 Recall Intermediate 4 30 4 39 6 6 Recent data seis 4 29 4 38 REF IN scie a o RR 1 10 QUT dei tn ttt thee be en 1 10 QUT ENEE a ioo 4 48 Reference frequency ER an TEE 4 49 6 86 adjustment mode 4 49 6 86 Reference oscillator 4 48 6 86 REM CEO sei eeh geesde 9 2 REMOQOTE s a 9 2 Remote control Eiberetil AN 5 4 GPIB
47. B The offset free level level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the menu The attenuator mode is set in the Attenuator Settings section The step width which is used when setting the level using the rotary knob with Variation Active On is set in the User Variation section Level Settings Amplitude 30 00 dBm Limit 19 00 dBm z Offset 0 00 aB z Attenuator Settings Mode Auto y Fixed Range PEP In 46 90 26 90 dBm User Variation Variation Active r Variation Step 1 00 dB y The offset free level attenuation mode level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the menu Amplitude RF Level Sets the RF level of the RF output connector The level entered and displayed here corresponds to the level at the RF output i e any offset entry is not taken into consideration Remote control command n a Note There is no GPIB command available for this setting The GPIB command SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL sets the level of the Level display i e the level containing offset 1411 4060 32 4 53 E 4 RF Level Limit RF Level Level Offset RF Level R amp S SMC100A Sets the level limit The value specifies the upper limit of the level at the RF output connector A message appears if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit and the level at the RF output is confined to the upper limit However the level indication is not influence
48. CN FP A E E E Temm FE a CN qw SOURce FREQuency CENTer 300 kHz REmax RFmax depending on model The command sets the center frequency of the sweep This setting in combination with the span setting SOURce FREQuency SPAN defines the sweep range This command is linked to the commands SOURce FREQuency STARt and SOURce FREQuency STOP i e changing these values causes the CENTer value to change and vice versa CENTer STARt STOP 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the Of f set value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if offset is set to 0 The value range for other Offset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 kHz Offset Raas tOffset Example FREQ CENT 400 MHz sets the center frequency for the frequency sweep to 400 MHz FREQ SPAN 200 MHz sets a span of 200 MHz This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz to 500 MHz Correlation CENTer STARt STOP 2 1411 4060 32 6 44 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce FREQuency CW FlXed 300 kHz RF max The command sets the frequency of the RF output signal for CW mode SOURce FREQuency MODE CW In Sweep mode SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep this value is linked to the current sweep frequency In addition to a numerical value it is also possible to sp
49. If no list is available a new list must be created Example The user correction mode is enable without a list being selected SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register This modulation forces other modulations off 140 A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active modulation The previous modulation has been switched off Example Enabling FM modulation switches PM modulation off SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Unknown list type specified 242 The list type selected is not valid for the desired operation Example The file extension for user correction files is uco It is not possible to enter another file extension when selecting a user correction file SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 15 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Annex Contents Chapter 10 Annex 10 A EE 1 Alphabetical List of Commande sse 1 ll HR 10 9 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1411 4060 32 X 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Commands 10 Annex Alphabetical List of Commands geo eee eee Pe Ee 6 5 RE 6 5 NN 6 5 ER aa 6 5 gr ET 6 6 IS aids oerte POR lai Ri DE ERU PO e e ERI 6 6 el 6 6 OP Ct A AA a ee ee E A eee 6 6 GEI 6 6 Wuiici P a dit A A tt bat meet aes tte ape 6 6 RN 6 6 KC 6 6 ills EE 6 6 RS A
50. LENGth USER As the filter length works as a multiplier for the measurement time this results in a constant measurement time SNRatio The filter length averaging factor is automatically selected so that sensor s intrinsic noise 2 standard deviations does not exceed the specified noise content The desired noise content is set with command SENSe FILTer NSRatio To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the averaging factor can be limited with the Timeout parameter command SENSe FILTer NSRatio MTIMe Example SENS FILT TYPE AUTO selects automatic filter selection Device specific SENSe POWer FREQuency frequency The command sets the RF frequency of the source if the user source is selected SENSe POWer SOURce USER Example SENS SOUR USER selects user defined source SENS FREO 2 44 GHz enters the RF frequency of the source which is 2 44 GHz Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 27 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SENSe POWer Offset 100 100 The command enters a level offset which is added to the measured level value after activation with command SENSe POWer Offset STATe ON This allows e g an attenuator in the signal path to be taken into account Example SENS POW OFFS 10 0 sets a level offset of 10 dB SENSe POWer Offset STATe ON OFF The command activates the addition of the level offset to the measur
51. Lou LM HE dui ee 6 7 SAM a isis cti riu e S Don ine AA sl A e s Hed 6 7 NOP Estos Mech tint st A O eI A Mun o t LA AID DULL fn Ad amr Acn A ELLE 6 7 ORE jie nits One Arad ae ala ee ad Ei rT ee ca ei ean tases et nee 6 7 MB Ant MI RID MM EM MM T ME eae naa E 6 7 MIL c 6 7 A ap i E E TT ue nupt ici itd 6 7 uu BN 6 8 C CALibr tion TER KE 6 8 CALibration FMOffset MEASure sss essen nante nnne anna 6 10 CALibration FREQuency MEA S re snee essen nnne nena nnne nnn nnns 6 8 CALibration LE Vel MEAS re oe de e eaa enu d goce a RE es Ree d de d nne 6 10 CALibration EEVelEXT DATA inii apti UO PEU P ORO T tae ER PER rS 6 10 1411 4060 32 10 1 E 1 Alphabetical List of Commands R amp S SMC100A D DIAGnostic TER El 6 13 DIAGnostic BGINTO La dil ets aha E ees Re ed ne 6 11 DIAGnostic BGINTo CATalog iii p P RE E s 6 12 DIAGnoStic INFO OTIMe ni nata Re E iecit olg e md 6 12 DIAGnostic INFO POCount sess esses senten etn s nen REAA seen near senten AANA EEEE ns 6 12 DIAGnostic POINCCATalog i E Red e ER RR RE RR 6 12 DISPlay PSAVe STATe odio de Hee te ote e s edet aede pl e o ERR Peta 6 13 DISPlay PSAVe HOEDOT inii Betas Heb boe He HR RP RPM 6 13 F FEORMatEDATA 3 ittm nau M 6 14 FORMatBORDE ec TEE 6 14 el EE 6 16 l INITiate lt 1 3 gt POWer CONTINUOUS ccooccoocccnncn
52. Manual Operation The R amp S SMC Signal Generator can be operated intuitively either via the interactive block diagram or via a menu tree All menus are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way Rotary knob keys and softkeys or alternatively a mouse allow direct and therefore convenient access to entries and settings The clear cut display shows the current signal generator state Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration The following chapter describes manual operation of the signal generator This includes a description of screenshots operation of menus and the block diagram and the setting of parameters Chapter 4 nstrument Functions includes a detailed description of signal generator functions Chapter 2 Getting Started explains the operating concept in general and includes a brief introduction to operation by a step by step description of the configuration Remote control of the instrument is described in chapters 5 Remote Control Basics and in chapter 6 Remote Control Commands Operating Concept The operating concept of the R amp S SMC enables the user to make settings as intuitively as possible and at the same time gives a permanent overview of characteristics of the generated signal and of the current instrument state Numerous on line help functions support user settings The block diagram is the core of the operating concept The graphics display showing the current configu
53. Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server 1411 4060 32 Selects if the DNS server address is assigned automatically or manually The selection is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Auto DHCP The DNS server address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE AUTO Static The DNS server address is assigned manually Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT Only for Static mode Enters the preferred DNS server address manually The new entry is only accepted and the preferred DNS server address changed after the Accept button is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS PREF 7 8 9 10 Only for Static mode Enters the alternate DNS server address manually This server is used if the DNS server specified in Preferred DNS Server is unreachable The new entry is only accepted and the alternate DNS server address changed after the Accept button is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS ALT 7 8 9 10 4 19 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Display Settings Setup Environment The Display Settings menu provides access to the settings for the display It is opened using the SETUP key under Environment Display Settings Screen Saver V Active Wait time 10 Min y Scr
54. SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 300 kHz RFmax 300 kKHZ RFmax The command transfers the frequency data to the table selected with CORR CSET SEL RST does not affect data lists Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz enters the frequency value in the table UCOR1 Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts The command queries the number of frequency values in the selected table The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ POIN queries the number of frequency values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 frequency values SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 34 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 40dB 6dB 40dB 6dB The command transfers the level data to the table selected with CORRection CSET SELect RST does not affect data lists Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucorl1 selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB 0 75dB enters the level values in the table ucor1 SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts The command queries the number of level values in the selected table
55. SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting SOUR FM DEViation This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example FM DEV 5E3 sets a modulation deviation of 5 kHz FM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the MOD EXT input Response 5E3 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000Hz V Compliant SOURce FM SOURce EXT INT The command selects the modulation source for frequency modulation INT is the internal modulation source which is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Example FM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source INTernal Compliant SOURce FM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates frequency modulation Activation of frequency modulation deactivates phase modulation Example FM STAT ON activates FM modulation Correlation FM ON deactivates phase modulation Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 43 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF sources and sweeps The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted per sce quee we wassums a a a A eee 0 ooo EE FP 1 E 0000 0 E EE E
56. STARt lt STOP as follows POINts STOP STARt STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example SWE POW STEP 10dB sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 dB of the previous level in each instance for a level sweep Device specific SOURce SWEep RESet ALL The command resets all active sweeps to the starting point The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example SWE RES resets all active sweeps to the starting point Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 82 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description STATus Subsystem This system contains the commands for the status reporting system RST has no effect on the status registers Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status A decimal value between 0 and 32767 527 4 is returned The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R amp S Signal Generator causes the status registers to be changed A decimal value between 0 and 32767 7 2 15 1 is set OT A OOOO sem EE one JL lee EE owes exu O LL Is A lee a S STATus QUEStionable E VENE oo Sev es p EE STATus OPERation EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on
57. SWEep FREQuency MODE sss sse nnne 6 63 L OiUlf cel FOutputSkWEent tt OuencvtPDOINts eene nnns 6 63 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FRE QUENCY Source 6 64 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing sss 6 66 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear essen 6 66 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP OGart hmie 6 66 SQURce FFOutput VOL EE 6 68 SOURce IMOB lalion STATG i nte pie rir bl o eis e E ed ere RR e ERR SE 6 68 SOURce IPGENISTA Te siia cepe tia De Pe DO HEP Eat o t endure 6 80 SOURCE PHA SC n A inb e E AA AA 6 70 ISQURcGe IPHASe REFerence 3 in de dc ibunt enia iis 6 70 ISQURce IPMEDEVialion n ne bU DRIED 6 71 SOURce PM EXTernal DE Viation sss esses esent enne nnne antennes 6 72 SOURce PM EXTernal COUPIIG sss cnn 6 71 SOURCE IPM SENSILVIV ioa eet A e i Eo e d e b etel 6 72 ISOURce JPM SOURGe i ae a ab t EUR pe e unte 6 72 SOURCe JPMESTA TO n ird p e a o o na e deg e dian ata 6 72 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sess 6 74 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet sss eene 6 75 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL esistente 6 75 Kieler Re RR RR EE 6 74 SOURGCe IPOWeFAEC SONGSO o at ld 6 74 1411 4060 32 10 5 E 1 Alphabetical List of Commands R amp S SMC100A S JLeOtUt ceJDOlder IM AMDL ude nennen nna 6 76
58. The command sets the time for the instrument internal clock Example SYST TIME 12 0 0 sets the time to precisely 12 pm SCPI Compliant SYSTem VERSion The command queries the SCPI version with which the instrument complies The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST VERS queries the SCPI version Response 1996 the instrument complies with the version from 1996 SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 98 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description TEST Subsystem The TEST system contains the commands for performing the routines as well as for direct manipulation of the hardware assemblies TEST DIRect The self tests return a 0 if the test is performed successfully otherwise a value other than 0 is returned None of the commands of this system have an RST value NOTICE Instrument damage caused by using the following commands The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the TEST DIRect command any safety mechanisms are bypassed The command is used for servicing purposes and should not be applied by the user Improper use could destroy the assembly IE pm AAA TEST DIRect assembly subaddress hex data string O TEST DIRect assembly subaddress hex data string The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command any safety mechanisms are bypassed This function is only available via remote control Example TEST DIR SSYN
59. The error queue can be queried via IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet The information is of a hierarchical structure The register status byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its associated mask register service request enable SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE The IST flag Individual STatus and the parallel poll enable register PPE allocated to it are also part of the status reporting system The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB 1411 4060 32 5 23 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Overview of the Status Register The following figure shows the status registers used in the Signal Generator 1 amp 7 Power on amp 6 User Request SRQ amp 5 Command Error amp 4 Execution Error amp 3 Device Dependent Error amp 2 Query Error amp 1 Request Control amp amp 0 Operation Complete amp ESE ESR amp SRE Error Queue Output Buffer amp amp amp amp a
60. V in order to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 Vs otherwise modulation distortions might occur With external pulse modulation the switching point is max 2 4 V and the voltage at the input should not exceed 5 V The maximum modulation frequency is 10 MHz for frequency and phase modulation 1411 4060 32 4 80 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Amplitude Modulation AM Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations or Other Operating Modes The table shows the modulations and operating modes which can be activated simultaneously or which deactivate each other Amplitude Modulation AM An internal and or external source can be selected for amplitude modulation A LF modulation generator is available as the internal source The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Amplitude Modulation Menu The Amplitude Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the SETUP key under Frequency Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower s
61. Variation Active for manual control i e the command also activates deactivates the user defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary knob Example POW STEP 2 sets the step width for the level setting to 2 dB POW STEP MODE USER actives this step width for level variation with the rotary knob manual control and with level values UP DOWN remote control DECimal Device specific SOURce POWer STOP Minimum level Maximum level The command sets the stop level in Sweep mode As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the Offset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer Offset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level Offset Maximum level Offset Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example POW STOP 3 sets the stop level for the level sweep to 3 dBm Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 66 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description modulation The polarity of the connector can be selected The PGEN Subsystem contains the command for activating deactivating the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector 2 D E o i a Ka O c A o o
62. address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This distinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a PC are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller Figure 8 4 Remote control via LAN from several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers 1411 4060 32 8 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Hardware Interfaces In the Measurement amp Automation Control program this setting is made on the Template tab Y TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0x001B36E0 Template Basic 1 0 Interface 170 viE nableE vent viDisableE vent viD iscardE vents viwaitOnE vent viGetAttribute viSetAttribute viLock viUnlock viEventHandler Pieauesied Kec Actual amp ccess Key Timeout E 0 Lock Type ce Exclusive Shared Retum Value EE Acquire a lock on the resource i Execute VXI 11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the IEC IEEE bus Table 8 4 VXI 11 Interface Messages amp ABO Abort Aborts the processing of the commands just re
63. allowed at the end of a command line or in a separate command line SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Hardware error 240 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the device SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Hardware missing 241 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a missing device hardware Example An option is not fitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Header suffix out of range 114 The command contains an illegal numeric suffix Example SOURce22 is not defined for the signal generator SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Illegal parameter value 224 The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is indicated TRIG SWEep SOUR TASTe SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Invalid block data 161 The command contains illegal block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data had been received or no numeric data element is sent after the introductory SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid Character 101 The command contains an invalid sign Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE amp SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR
64. also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer Offset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level Offset Maximum level Offset Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet c Example POW SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode POW MAN 5 dBm sets an RF level of 5 dBm for the next setting in the Step sweep mode POW MODE SWE sets the Level Sweep mode POW MAN 5 5 dBm triggers the next sweep step with a level of 5 5 dBm 1411 4060 32 6 64 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce POWer MODE CW FIXed SWEep The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output level Parameters CW FIXed The instrument operates at a constant level CW and FlXed are synonyms The output level is set with SOURce POWer SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The level is set using the commands SOURce POWer STARt STOP MANual Example POW MODE SWEep sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce POW STARt STOP MANual become effective Correlation SCPI Compliant SOURce POWer STARt Minimum level Maximum level The command sets th
65. amp S SMC100A Contents Error Messages Contents Chapter 9 Error Messages 9 Error Niege ege ee 9 1 Introduction Status Information and Messages 9 1 Status Informiation tacita iia deet 9 1 Error MESAS th eed T i eee 9 3 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages 9 4 Block data not allowed 7168 9 4 Character data not allowed 71491 9 4 Character data too long 144 oo eeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 9 4 Command Error TOU emen 9 4 Command protected 203 sss enne 9 5 Data out of range 222 9 5 Data type error EN LA EE 9 5 Device specific error L 2001 9 5 Exponent too large C7123 ees 9 5 Expression data not allowed 178 sse 9 6 GET not allowed 2108 9 6 Hardware error 240 esee eterne ettet 9 6 Hardware missing 241 sss 9 6 Header suffix out of range 2141 9 6 Illegal parameter value C2241 9 7 Invalid block data 161 ssssss m 9 7 Invalid Character 20711 9 7 Invalid separator 103 a R me 9 7 Invalid Suffix CN EA EE 9 7 Lists not same length 226 9 8 Missing parameter 100 9 8 INO tel didas 9 8 Numeric data not allowed 22091 9 8 Out of memory EH 9 8 Parameter not allowed 2108 9 9 Program mnemonic too long 312 9 9 Queue overflow 250 9 9 Query interrupted 410 sssssssseeem mmn 9 9 Query unterminated A20 ene 9 9 Query de
66. an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties consult a physician immediately to determine the cause If products components are mechanically and or thermically processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled e g for disposal purposes by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed Sheet 2 10 Grouped Safety Messages If handling the product yields hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn life requires increased protection pregnant women should be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be endangered by electromagnetic radiation The employer operator is required to assess workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to
67. and activate lists in which level correction values predefined by the user are freely assigned to RF frequencies Correction is performed by the user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency see User Correction on page 4 59 Note Please see your R amp S NRP power sensor manual for detailed information on the used power sensor NRP Z Power Viewer Menu The Power Sensor menu is opened either in th RF function block or using the SETUP key RF RF ON Frequency Phase Ref Oscill EMF Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep y 1411 4060 32 4 46 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Power Viewer The menu shows the power sensor type the measurement value and allows to configure the measurement Sensor Type NRP 291 S N 900002 Level Peak Show Level Permanent Use SParameter Sensor Power Sensors Type Power Sensors 1411 4060 32 Level Avg IE 7 t Zero Source RF Frequency Level Offset off y 0 00 dB Filter Auto D 128 e Indicates the USB connector used for the detected sensors Remote control command SENS STAT Response 0 no power sensor is connected Response 1 a power sensor is connected at the USB connector Note The software version of the connected power sensor can be retrieved by means of the remote control command SENS POW SVER
68. and all settings protected by these passwords like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed Not affected by the Factory Preset are also user data lists or instrument settings files created for example by means of the Save Recall function Factory Preset Execute Factory Preset AA Resets instrument to factory configuration Security settings and user data are not effected Remote control command SYST FPR Switching to Manual Control Local Key In remote control mode a status message appears in the display header The rest of the display remains unchanged and shows the current instrument status i e the status which exists under the remote control settings The instrument can be operated e g menus can be opened However it is not possible to enter or change values The status message additionally indicates whether the LOCAL key is disabled or enabled see also Chapter 5 Chapter 5 section Switch Over to Remote Control If the REMOTE status message is shown the LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote control to manual control The current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched otherwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control If the REM LLO status message remote local lockout is displayed the instrument can be switched from remote control to manual control by means of remote control only e g with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLO
69. aware that in the event of a fire toxic substances gases liquids etc that may be hazardous to your health may escape from the product The product can be very heavy Be careful when moving it to avoid back or other physical injuries Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves Handles on the products are designed exclusively for personnel to hold or carry the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles for fastening the product to or on means of transport such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport and for observing the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle The driver is always responsible for the safety of the vehicle The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or coll
70. be set All open menus are of equal priority not modal and can be accessed any time The R amp S SMC can be entirely operated from the front panel Peripherals such as mouse or keyboard can be connected but are not essential With the aid of the rotary knob the user can navigate in the block diagram and the dialogs The cursor is moved line by line through the block diagram or dialog Turning the button clockwise advances the cursor The selected block can be activated or deactivated with the On checkboxes or with the MOD ON OFF or RF ON OFF key respectively Active blocks are highlighted by a colored background 1411 4077 62 2 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Example of Setup Generation of an Amplitude Modulated Signal In the example a simple AM modulated signal is configured Proceed as described below 1 Activate default preset state 2 Select and activate AM modulation 3 Set frequency and level and activate RF signal Step 1 Activate default preset state Freq RF OFF MOD OFF Level 1 000 000 000 0 cr 30 00 dem gt ALC Auto Info Set a defined instrument state by pressing the PRESET key Step 2 Select and activate AM modulation 3 Select the Modulation block by turning the rotary knob Modulation Frequency Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the modulation can be selected The Amplit
71. can be started in the Internal Adjustments menu The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Adjustment is recommended if the temperature range in which the instrument is operated changes or prior to all applications which require maximum level and frequency accuracy During adjustment a bar indicates the status of progress If an error occurs adjustment is terminated and an error message is output in the info line NOTICE Risk of invalid adjustment In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument make sure that the instrument is warm before performing adjustments The warm up time is 30 minutes The Internal Adjustments menu under System is opened up using the SETUP key Adjust All Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual supplied Remote control command CAL ALL Adjust Synthesis Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency Remote control command CAL FREQ MEAS Adjust Level Performs all adjustments which affect the level The correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality Remote control command CAL LEV MEAS Adjustment Data Selects the data used for external level correction By default the instrument uses correctio
72. check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all in formation required for the maintenance of R amp S SMC by ex changing modules In addition it describes how to perform a firmware update and how to install options The Internet site at Signal Generator R amp S SMC100A provides the most up to date information on the R amp S SMC Additionally firm ware updates including the associated release notes instrument drivers current data sheets and application notes are provided for download on the internet site The current operating manual at a time is available as printable PDF file in the download area 0 3 E 1 Contents Putting into Operation R amp S SMC100A Contents Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 1411 4077 62 Putting into Operation ccccccccccccccccnnnnncnnnnonenenenononononenennnnonos 1 1 Introduction Putting into Operaton m 1 1 Legend for Front Panel View 1 1 Legend for Rear Panel View ooooonccccconcccccconcccccnnnoncconano nac naar o eee 1 8 Putting into Operation 1 11 Unpacking the Instrument n 1 11 Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19 Rack 1 11 Safety Instructions sannari rriari ai ai 1 12 EMC Safety Precautions sss 1 13 Connecting the R amp S SMC to the AC Guppiy 1 13 SwWitchirig OTi oie eere eterno herr eee deri te oe tenter edd 1 13 Start Display and Boo
73. delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Remote control command SOUR PULM DEL 22us Double Pulse only Sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation Remote control command SOUR PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us Double Pulse only Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse Remote control command SOUR PULM DOUB DEL 22s 4 90 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Trigger Mode Pulse Generator External Trigger Input Slope Pulse Generator Gate Input Polarity Pulse Generator 1411 4060 32 Pulse Modulation Selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation Auto Ext Triggered Ext Gated The pulse generator signal is generated continuously Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE AUTO The pulse generator signal is triggered by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE EXT The pulse generator signal is gated by an external gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE EGAT External Trigger only Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger at the PULSE EXT connector Positive Negative The pulse generator is triggered on the pos
74. displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF output but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered The signal generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset However the level entered and displayed in the Level menu of the RF Ana Mod function block always corresponds to the RF output level Any level offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Level in header RF output level Level in menu Level offset An external reference is used The external signal with selectable frequency and defined level must be input at the REF IN connector It is output at the REF OUT connector Status information displayed to the left of the Info line REMOTE REM LLO The instrument is remote controlled The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote control to manual control The current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched otherwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control The instrument is remote controlled The instrument can be switched from remote control to manual control by means of remote control only e g with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC generator the LOCAL key is disabled The key is disabled by remote control with the command LLO Status information displayed in the
75. extension are indicated in the selected directory Remote control command n a 1411 4060 32 4 37 E 4 Storing and Loading Instrument Data R amp S SMC100A Directory Files Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete Create New Directory 1411 4060 32 Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located The window to the right lists all files in this directory The file to be deleted or copied can be highlighted The path is indicated above the directory window Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user Selects the file Remote control command n a Cuts the selected file It can be pasted into a different directory using the Paste button Remote control command MMEM DEL var test savercl Copies the selected file lt can be pasted into a different or the same directory using the Paste button When pasting the file into the same directory file name Copy of lt filename gt is given automatically When pasting the file into a different directory the original filename is kept Remote control command MMEM COPY var user setl wv var user set2 wv Pastes the file that has been copied or cut before Remote control command n a Renames the selected file or directory The new name can be entered in the New Filename window Remote control command MMEM MOVE test02 dm_iqd set2 dm_iqd Deletes the selected file Before the file is deleted a messag
76. for measurement frequency of the sensor RF Measurement source is the RF signal of the generator The RF frequency is used as the measurement frequency of the sensor and the corresponding correction factor is used In this mode the RF frequency of the generator is send to the sensor automatically if changed Remote control command SENS POW SOUR A User Measurement source is any freely selectable source The frequency is entered manually under frequency Remote control command SENS POW SOUR USER 4 49 E 4 Power Viewer Frequency Power Sensors Level Offset Power Sensors Filter Length Power Sensors 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Source User only Enters the frequency for measurement source User Remote control command SENS POW FREQ 2 5MHz Activates and defines a level offset which is added to the measured value This allows e g an attenuator in the signal path to be taken into account The offset is always entered in dB irrespective of the selected unit for result display Remote control command SENS POW OFFS 2 dB SENS POW OFFS STAT ON Selects the filter length used for measurement The averaging filter is used to reduce fluctuations in the measured result to the extent desired Such fluctuations can be caused by inherent noise of the measuring instrument modulation of the measurement signal or beats from the superposition of adjacent carriers A more stable display has
77. frequency or level changes Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 61 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce POWer ALC SONCe The command briefly activates level control for correction purposes The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example POW ALC OFF deactivates automatic level control POW ALC SONC level control is performed once only Device specific SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF AUTO The command activates deactivates automatic level control Parameters ON internal level control is permanently activated OFF internal level control is deactivated Sample 8 Hold mode is activated AUTO internal level control is activated deactivated automatically depending on the operating state Example POW ALC ON activates automatic level control Compliant SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Minimum level Maximal level The command sets the RF output level in CW mode In addition to numerical values it is also possible to specify UP and DOWN The level is then increased or decreased by the value specified under SOURce POWer STEP As with the Level value entered in the header the offset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer Offset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formul
78. help pages It has a hierarchical structure The highlighted line indicates where the currently displayed page is within the contents list e Index link The Index link calls up the index The index contains an alphabetical list of all terms which refer to functions of the instrument For example it contains all parameter names and all IEC IEEE bus commands The associated help page can be opened by selecting an entry e Back link The Back link calls up the page last viewed e Internal links in the text They open pages which are directly linked to the described function In this way it is possible for example to call up the description of the IEC IEEE bus command for any particular function e Previous Next links The Previous Next links allow scroll through the help pages The sequence of the described functions corresponds to their position in the menus The links are highlighted in blue and can be selected and called up using the rotary knob Note The online help for the R amp S SMC Signal Generator is also accessible via the Help menu A desired topic can be selected via the table of contents select Manual or the index select Index 1411 4060 32 4 32 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data Storing and Loading Instrument Data The Signal Generator allows complete instrument settings to be stored on the internal flash memory or an external USB device Defined and complex instrument settings can then be re
79. help files chm are also available on the CD ROM and can be used as a standalone help 1411 4060 32 0 1 E 1 User Documentation R amp S SMC100A Documentation CD ROM The CD ROM provides the complete user documentation for the Signal Generator The online help system chm The complete operating manual and service manual in printable form paf The data sheet brochure and data sheet in printable form Links to different useful sites in the R amp S internet Note Please use the ADOBE Acrobat Reader for PDF files and the browser Internet Explorer gt 4 0 for the HTML help Optional Documentation The printed version of the operating and service manual provides the contents of the quick start manual plus the complete reference and the service information for the Signal Generator This manual can be ordered as an option stock no 1411 4060 32 English A4 format or 1411 4060 39 English letter format see ordering information in the data sheet Note The CD ROM contains the pdf version of the manuals Manual Control The operating manual contains comprehensive information about the instrument functions and remote control in addition to the chapters of the quick start guide It includes information about maintenance of the instrument and about error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument It is sub divided into 10 chapters The data sheet informs
80. i Menu header The header line contains the name of the menu e g Frequency Phase and the button for closing the menu The button can be operated with the mouse For operation from the front panel the CLOSE key can be used The remaining menu area is variable and comprises various fields for setting parameters Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name The kind of setting varies depending on the parameter to be set FM Deviation 1 00000 KkHz gt Entry field File Name A numeric value e g frequency offset or an uorhgn alpha numeric value e g file name can be entered in this field Selection field FM Deviation The E button indicates that a selection can be made from a list The fold down selection list is displayed below the selection field Depending on the number of entries the full list or only part of it is shown One entry at a time can be selected from the list If an item is not available for selection it is printed in grey and cannot be accessed 1411 4077 62 3 9 E 1 R amp S SMC100A LFGen Frequency 1 000 00 kHz LFGen Frequency 1000 00 Hz e Display Units The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the value When the parameter is edited the unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front panel keys When the entry is completed the unit can be changed In this case the value remains unchanged but is automatic
81. in our example e The left right cursor keys first shift the entry focus within the menu range form left to right or vice versa in the example from the directory tree to the file list Press again and the entry focus is shifted up one menu level Clicking the rotary knob Enter performs a setting In the example of the File Select menu this is the display of the subdirectories if a directory is marked and if a file is marked the selection of this file After a file has been selected the menu closes automatically The ESC key moves the cursor to the next higher menu level Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Selects a menu area Select menu area using the Select menu area using the rotary knob or the arrow arrow keys Press the Enter The menu area is selected keys Press the rotary knob key by selecting an entry or the ENTER key The arrow keys up down Rotary knob and arrow keys move the cursor only within up down move the cursor the selected menu area only within the selected menu area Exits a menu area Press the ESC key Press the Enter key Rotary knob or arrow keys The arrow keys move the eae ion move the cursor between cursor between different tsi E th different menu areas menu areas outside the area 1411 4077 62 3 13 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Entering a Value Setting Parameters Setting Parameters Numeric and alphanumeric values can be edi
82. in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line see also example in section Database and Instrument Hardware Example Commands and queries in one command line The response from a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable Sending SOURCe FREQuency 1E 9 LEVel 80 SOURce FREQuency always returns 1E 9 1GHz When SOURce FREQuency 1E 9 FREQuency LEVel 80 is sent however the result is not specified by SCPI The result could be the RF generator frequency before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages 1411 4060 32 5 21 E 1 RES SMC100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Synchronization In order to prevent an overlapped execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set and has settled By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur see table Synchronization with OPC O
83. indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC IEEE bus command SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POWer use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by 8 bytes Example aft 125 345678E6 b 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT generators SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 216 MKDS a MKDS b in the command string introduces the binary block indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating point number with 8 bytes each The actual binary data follow now As the function IBWRT requires a text string MKD is used for the type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generator SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQ 125 345678E6 127 876543E6 5 16 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the key words of a command In a command line the sep
84. instrument from the standby mode to the operating state provided the power switch on the rear of the instrument is switched on The yellow LED right is on in the standby mode the green LED left is on when the instrument is ready for operation Danger of shock hazard See chapter 3 section Setting Parameters and chapter 4 section RF Signal and Modulations See chapter 1 section Switching On The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode 1 7 E 1 Legend for Rear Panel View R amp S SMC100A Legend for Rear Panel View This section gives an overview of connectors on the rear panel of the R amp S SMC Each connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet 1 2 3 od OC 100 240 V AC 50 60M2 12 04A PI F IEC 127 T 315 H 250 V 1123 AECH PULSE EXT PULSE REFOUT _ INST TRIG _ VIDEO NN e e E 11 10 98 7 6 5 4 Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1 AC supply AC supply connector See chapter 1 section Connecting th When the R amp S SMC is connected to ee i R amp S SMC to the AC the AC supply it automatically sets Supply and data itself to the correct range for the shest applied voltage range see type label There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses Power switch The main power switch switches the power of the ins
85. is activated The sweep to be executed depends on the respective MODE setting SOUR SWEep POW FREQ MODE and SOUR LFO SWEep FREQ MODE The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example TRIG starts all active sweeps Device specific TRIGger SWEep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle EXTernal BUS The command sets the trigger source for all sweeps The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO SINGle MODE SINGLE EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As Soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGIe The sweep is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SOURce SWEep POWer FREQuency EXEC or TRG or TRIGger PSWeep FSWeep IMMediate If SOURce SWEep POWer MODE is set to STEP one step is executed The sweep mode has to be set to AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the TRIGGER conn
86. keys and an external mouse or keyboard that may be connected can be disabled with command SYST KLOC ON Menus cannot be opened in this case and switchover from remote control to manual operation is only possible by means of a remote control command Inadvertent switchover with the LOCAL key is not possible in this case Operation of the LOCAL key alone can be disabled with interface command amp LLO 1411 4060 32 5 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus To be able to control the instrument via the IEC IEEE bus instrument and controller must be linked by an IEC IEEE bus cable An IEC IEEE bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller The controller must address the instrument with the set IEC IEEE bus address The IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory set to 28 It can be changed manually in the Environment GPIB menu or via IEC IEEE bus with command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually Setup Remote GPIB P GPIB Settings GPIB channel address 28 E Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Inform controller about old address CALL IBWRT generator SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Get instrument to new address CALL IBPAD genera
87. length and therefore the measurement time can be short With very low signal levels the filter length and therefore the measurement time is increased in order to reduce noise The used filter length is indicated in the field to the right Remote control command SENS POW FILT TYPE AUTO SENS POW FILT LENG AUTO The filter length is set manually The filter length is entered in the entry window to the right As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window this results in a constant measurement time Values 1 and 24n are settable Note The time window varies in manual control it is fixed to 20 ms in remote control The Auto Once button can be used to search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions The found filter length is indicated in the field to the right Remote control command SENS POW FILT TYPE USER SENS POW FILT SONC or SENS POW FILT LENG USER 16 The averaging factor is selected so that the sensor s intrinsic noise 2 standard deviations does not exceed the specified noise content The desired noise content is entered in the entry field to the right To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the averaging factor can be limited with the Timeout parameter Remote control command SENS POW FILT TYPE NSR SENS POW FILT NSR 0 001 SENS POW FILT NSR MTIM 4 Activates the use of th
88. may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer Its ventilation must not be obstructed during operation Unless otherwise specified the following performed after parts relevant to safety have requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz been replaced visual inspection PE products conductor test insulation resistance prescribed operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 use only in enclosed spaces max operation altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Prior to performing any work on the product or opening the product the product must be disconnected from the supply network Any adjustments replacements of parts maintenance or repair must be carried out only by technical personnel authorized by 1171 0000 42 04 00 measurement leakage current measurement functional test As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens e g nickel such as aluminum cannot be generally excluded If you develop
89. must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma A few queries permit the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of the types of parameter refer to Section Parameters Example SOURce POWer ATTenuation MAXimum Answer 60 his query requests the maximal value for the attenuation If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g several inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Optional keywords must be specified if they select a function with the suffix Example SOURce LFOutput2 FREQuency 1 5kHz This command sets the frequency of secondLF generator frame 5 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon A colon at the beginning of a command marks the root node of the command tree Example SOURce POWer CENTer MINimum OUTPut STATe ON This command line contains two commands The first command is part of the SOURce system and is used to specif
90. no load Voltage of EMF RF voltage If this setting is deactivated the level is displayed as a Level voltage with 50 Ohm presetting Remote control command n a 1411 4060 32 4 56 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Automatic Level Control ALC Automatic Level Control ALC Automatic level control Automatic Level Control can be used with almost all applications except for pulse modulation The level control status is permanently displayed as a status message in the info line ALC Auto Info The preset status is Auto In this mode the level control is automatically adapted to the operating conditions The standard operating mode is with active level control This provides the highest level accuracy Level control can be forced to Sample amp Hold or On for particular applications If Sample amp Hold is selected the level is recalibrated for every level and frequency setting For this purpose level control is activated briefly at a defined signal the level adjuster is then held at the attained value and level control is deactivated Note The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMC is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hold In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after eac
91. of a POW MAN command under remote control With manual control the level increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value specified under SOUR SWE POW STEP With remote control the level increases by the value specified under SWEep POW STEP which each sent POW MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each external trigger triggers one sweep step only Mode Extern Step The level increases by the value entered under SWEep POWer STEP Example SWE POW MODE AUTO selects Mode Auto for a level sweep 1411 4060 32 6 80 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce SWEep POWer POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in a level sweep The command is linked to the command SWEep POWer STEP as follows POINts STOP STARt STEP LOG 1 If POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example POW STAR 30 dBm sets the start frequency to 30 dBm POW STOP 10 dBm sets the stop frequency to 10 dBm SWE POW POIN 20 sets 20 sweep steps The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 1 dB Resolution Options Correlation The value of SWE POW STEP is Device specific adjusted automatically adapted to instrument properties SOURce SWEep POWer SHAPe SAWTooth TRlangle The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep
92. panel key emulation that can be operated with the mouse see chapter 3 section Legend of Front Panel Controls Installation of the software Ultr VNC and establishing the connection between external PC and signal generator for Windows operating system is described in the following Remote access via an external controller with Linux Unix operating system is performed accordingly Configuration for Remote Access via Ultr VNC The instrument is operated with the aid of the program UItr VNC It is available as a free of charge download on the internet for operating system Window XP htip www uvnc com download index html and on the R amp S SMC CD ROM Remote access of the signal generator is possible under the following conditions The external PC with Linux Unix or Windows operating system Windows 95 or higher is equipped with a LAN interface which is configured for the network The signal generator and PC are linked via a LAN A user specific password for the VNC connection is defined on the R amp S SMC The default password is instrument it can be changed in the Environment Security section of the Setup menu The Ultr VNC Viewer software is installed on the external PC or any other VNC client R amp S SMC IP address and the user specific password for the VNC connection are entered in the VNC Viewer panel NOTICE Risk of unauthorized access After enabling the VNC connection any user on the network who knows the passw
93. radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the danger Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make certain that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to handle operating the products otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer to select suitable personnel for operating the products Prior to switching on the product it must be ensured that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with earthing contact and protective earth connection Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use If the product has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug 1171 0000 42 04 00 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases it must be ensured that
94. remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys SPE Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 24 Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable IBCMD controller CHR 25 End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure IBCMD controller CHR 21 End of the parallel poll state Addressed Commands The addressed commands are encoded 00 OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners Table 8 3 Addressed Commands VISUAL BASIC Command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to the Local state manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure IBPPC device data Configures instrument for parallel poll Additionally the VISUAL BASIC command executes PPE PPD 1411 4060 32 8 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Hardware Interfaces LAN Connector The unit is equipped with an LAN interface as standard The LAN connector is at the rear of the instrument Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator files can
95. section The menu is used to activate deactivate user correction and to create select and activate the correction data lists User Correction Settings State Off User Cor Data None Edit User Cor Data Import Export gt gt gt The upper sections provide access to the automatic level control settings see section Automatic Level Control ALC page 4 57 State User Correction Activates deactivates user correction The UCOR status message appears in the frequency and level display Remote control command SOUR CORR STAT ON Value User Indicates the current value for level correction Correction Remote control command SOUR CORR VAL Calls the File Select menu for selecting and creating a list or the File User Correction Data Manager User Correction Select User Correction Data New User Correction Data File Manager Remote control command MMEM CDIR var ucor SOUR CORR CSET CAT Response Ucorl Ucorz SOUR CORR CSET SEL Ucorl SOUR CORR CSET DEL Ucor2 1411 4060 32 4 60 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Edit New User Correction Data User Correction 1411 4060 32 User Correction Calls the editor for editing the selected user correction list A list consists of any number of frequency level value pairs The currently selected list is displayed Each list is saved to the R amp S SMC Signal Generator as a separate file with the fi
96. selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descending sweep directions Device specific SAWTooth 1411 4060 32 6 55 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LlNear LOGarithmic The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Example LFO SWE SPAC LIN selects linear sweep spacing SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 STOP STARt The command sets the step width for the linear sweep This command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows The following applies for STARt lt STOP POINts STOP STARt STEP LIN 1 If STEP LIN changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example FO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 2 kHz FO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz FO SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing FO SWE STEP 2 kHz sets the sweep step width to 2 kHz The number of sweep steps for linear Sweep spacing POINts is automatically set to 11 Correlation The value of LFO SWE POIN is Device specific adjusted automatically SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 100 PCT The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated for STARt lt STOP using the following formula New frequen
97. sequence shape Parameters SAWTooth One sweep runs from the start level to the stop level The subsequent sweep starts at the start level again i e the shape of sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth TRlangle One sweep runs from start to stop level and back e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start level again Example SOUR SWE POW SHAP TRI selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descending sweep directions SAWTooth Device specific SOURce SWEep POWer SPACing MODE The command queries the sweep spacing The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always linear This command is a query command and has no RST value Example SWE POW SPAC MODE queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep Result LIN linear spacing Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 81 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 165 dB The command sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next level value of a sweep is calculated for STARt STOP using the following formula New level Old level STEP LOG x Old level STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old level The level is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is given in decibels whereby the suffix dB must always be used The command is linked to the command SWEep POWer POINts for
98. specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot access the EEPROM 202 A error occurs when writing or reading a EEPROM Example The EEPROM is defect SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot access hardware 200 The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful Example The module is not installed not properly installed or missing SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot open file 460 The selected file can not be opened Remedy Check the path and file name SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot read file 462 The file can not be read Example The file contents are not compatible with the file type SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 13 E 1 Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Cannot write file 461 The file can not be written Example The file is read only SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Driver initialization failed 204 Initialization of a driver fails when booting the instrument firmware Example The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software configuration of the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register File contains invalid data 465 The selected file contains data that is not valid for the file type The file extension determines the data that is v
99. the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must have been reached again Example With Frequency Modulation the settable FM deviation depends on the set RF frequency and the FM mode The Signal Generator responds as follows Assuming the set RF frequency is 60 MHz and normal FM mode is set i e the maximum value for FM deviation is 650 kHz A deviation of 1 MHz should be set To do so the RF frequncy has to be changed to e g 100 MHz The following commands are sent 1 All commands in one program message SOUR FM STAT ON SOUR FM DEV 1MHz SOUR FREQ 100MHz This command line yields the desired setting Since a valid state is obtained at the end of the program message no error message is issued 1411 4060 32 5 19 E 1 RES SMC100A Instrument Model and Command Processing 2 Each command in a separate program message SOUR FM STAT ON SOUR FM DEV 1MHz SOUR FREO 100MHz The command for setting the FM deviation is rejected and an execution error is generated At the time when this command is processed the previous setting of the RF frequency 60 MHZ is still valid i e the value for the FM deviation is outside the permissible value range The two other commands are set 3 The two first commands in one program message the third command in a separate program message SOUR FM STAT ON SOUR FM DEV 1MHz SOUR FREQ 100MHz The command for setting the FM deviation is reject
100. the header cf Chapter 5 Optional Keywords The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and will be briefly explained in the following see also Chapter 5 Section Parameters This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 6 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A lt numeric_value gt lt num gt Command Description These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are permitted MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest poss
101. the phase modulation The PhiM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce PM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem e g frequency The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector EII lomo feo l BEES ISOUR PMEXTematDEVieion Lie o CI A A TT EE E A ooo COI CU A 1L SOURce PM DEViation 0 20 RAD The command sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Example PM 5E3 sets the PM modulation deviation to 5 RAD See data sheet Compliant SOURce PM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input EXT MOD in the case of phase modulation Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT can be set independently for modulations FM and PhiM Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example PM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external phase modulation Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 59 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce PM EXTernal DEViation 0 160 RAD The command sets the modulation deviation in case of external phas
102. to be traded off against longer measurements The measurement result is obtained from a two stage averaging process Note Longer measurements does not mean that it takes longer to display a new result but rather that it takes longer for the result to settle when the power changes Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window The measurement result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time windows The number N is the filter length the factor of 2 arises because the output signals from the microwave detector to suppress low frequency noise are chopped at the same rate as the time windows which means that an independent measured value can only be obtained from two consecutive values As the filter length is the multiplier for the time window it directly influences the measurement time The filter length can be selected automatically or can be manually set to a fixed value As a preliminary you should always check if the auto mode is giving satisfactory results because you will always have to adjust an optimal manual filter length setting if the power is not constant Selection Fixed Noise is offered for reaching a defined measurement accuracy 4 50 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Use SParameter Power Sensors 1411 4060 32 Auto User Fixed Noise Power Viewer The filter length is automatically selected and adapted to the currently measured value With very high signals the filter
103. user selectable the extension is assigned automatically and cannot be entered The file is saved to the selected path Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters page 3 13 By using the rotary knob or cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by clicking the rotary knob or using the Enter key The rotary knob and the up down cursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys it is possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory will only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the ESC key again shifts the entry focus up one level The button for saving or loading the file can be selected and pressed After the setting e g after selecting the file the menu will be closed automatically e Load file Mark file and load it by clicking the rotary knob or by pressing the Select button softkey e Save file Enter file name in the File Name field Mark the directory to which the file is to be saved and then click the Save button softkey e Create file Enter file name in the File Name field Mark the directory to which the file is to be saved and then click the Create button softkey The created file is empty it must be filled with the necessary values in the individual edito
104. using the numeric keypad e g 2 GHz Terminate the entry by pressing the appropriate unit key RF OFF 74 000 000 000 0 ct LEVEL Enter the level of the desired RF carrier in the same way Press the LEVEL key to activate the editing mode for level entry The level entry field in the header section of the display is highlighted Level EU UU d n y II Juwua du ua 1 GJ 2 E Enter the level value of the desired RF carrier using the numeric keypad e g 25 dBm Terminate the entry by pressing the appropriate unit key 1411 4077 62 Level 25 00 dBm 2 7 E 1 Example of Setup RES SMC100A Level 9 Freg Y 2 000 000 000 0 cnz 25 00 dbm ALC Auto Info SS Select the RF block by turning the rotary knob and activate it by pressing the RF ON OFF key The AM modulation signal is now present at the RF output 1411 4077 62 2 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Example of Setup Generation of an RF Frequency Sweep Signal In the example an RF frequency sweep is configured Proceed as described below 1 Activate default preset state 2 Configure and activate RF frequency sweep The settings are start frequency 100 MHz stop frequency 500 MHz linear spacing with a step width of 1 MHz dwell time 10 ms single sweep mode 3 Activate RF signal 4 Trigger single sweep Step 1 Activate default preset
105. was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Step sweep always starts at the LF start frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE STEP SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1E3 TRIGO SWE SOUR EXT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SOUR EAUT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Resets the sweep The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there Remote control command SW E R 4 95 E 4 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R
106. 0 6 57 PULSE VIDEO ise reta 1 10 RE ico uu 1 6 REF QUT did erre 1 10 6 88 OVEN COND seis siesta ee bee s 9 4 Overlapping execution sssss 5 20 OVERLOAD 2 i iere 4 60 Overvoltage protection 4 60 6 26 P Parallel Poll is 5 28 Parameter Commandes 5 16 Parameter not allowed 108 9 13 Part numbers ri n enne 4 10 Paste uten de 4 32 4 40 PCI DUS i a is 4 10 Peer to peer connection sus 1 22 E 1 Index Phase RF output signal 4 47 6 70 PhiM Deviation cooonccccccccococonionononcnn 4 94 6 71 6 72 External Coupling 4 94 6 71 Ereguency i toten 4 95 6 58 Sensitivity AA 4 94 6 72 eil 4 93 6 72 NI 4 93 6 72 Point to point Congechon 1 22 Polarity Pulse Modulation 4 97 6 83 Power On ENEE i stes eise 4 10 6 12 Slate estas IRR nd 4 60 6 27 PPE Parallel poll enable register 5 26 Preferred DNS Server Address SO UD iii a 4 20 6 108 Prodi titan 1 18 factory settings ooooonnonicicinnncicccnncccaancnncn ns 6 113 instrument settings 1 18 4 6 6 7 6 116 Program mnemonic too long 112 9 13 Protection overvoltage 010001111112 4 60 6 26 Protection service functions 4 22 6 117 Pulse Delay tee ade 4 98 6 81 Pulse generator state sssss 4 107 Pulse Mode 4
107. 00A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Command protected 203 The desired command could not be executed as it was protected with a password Example The command CAL FREQ might be protected with a password Remedy Use command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 to enable the command SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Data out of range 222 A value of the transmitted command was outside the legal range Example Command SOUR FREQ only permits entries in the range of min to max frequency SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Data type error 104 The command contains an invalid value indication Example ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting FREQ ON SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Device specific error 300 Device specific error not defined in greater detail SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Exponent too large 123 The magnitude of the exponent is too large SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 5 E 1 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Expression data not allowed 178 The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register GET not allowed 105 A Group Execute Trigger GET is within a command line Note A Group Execute Trigger GET is only
108. 10ms Ext Trigger Input Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger Slope RF Frequency This setting affects the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of Sweep the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG 1411 4060 32 4 73 E 4 Sweep Mode R amp S SMC100A Level Sweep Menu The Level Sweep menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep SE ee In the top section of the menu the Level Sweep mode is activated and the level range and the sweep mode are selected The buttons are used to reset the level sweep all sweep modes or to execute the level sweep Single mode Mode Auto Reset Sweep Start Level 30 00 dBm z Stop Level 10 00 dBm z Current Level 23 00 dBm z Shape Sawtooth zl Step 1o0 dB d Dwell Time 10 0 ms z The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section State RF Level Activates Level Sweep mode Sweep Note Activating the level sweep automatically deactivates the RF sweep and LF sweep Remote control comm
109. 11 4060 32 Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle continues from the current Sweep setting The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR AUTO SOUR FREQ MODE SWE Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR SING SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ EXEC 4 68 E 1 R amp S SMC100A 1411 4060 32 Step Extern Single Sweep Mode Sets a step by step sweep cycle If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Freq Any variation to the Current Freq value triggers a sweep step The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the current RF frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREO MODE MAN SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN
110. 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups program messages control command to the instrument response messages values returned by the instrument service request spontaneous queries of the instrument and low level control messages interface messages A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels a core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel program response and low level control messages The abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more details refer to the VXI 11 specification TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI 11 Revision 1 0 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXlbus and TCP IP IEEE 488 2 Instrument Interface Specification VXI 11 3 Draft 0 3 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXIbus 1411 4060 32 8 5 E 1 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMC100A rt WEEK Fi Core channel program response control messages Instrument DEE ER EE EEN gt Controller Abort channel abort Interrupt channel Service request Figure 8 3 VXI 11 channels between instrument and controller The number of controllers that can
111. 1411 4077 62 2 1 E 1 Description of Individual Diagram Blocks RES SMC100A Description of Individual Diagram Blocks Available Blocks Block Function of block Status display in the block Effect of the On checkboxes or the MOD ON OFF and RF ON OFF keys Mod Gen The internal modulation Status of modulation Switches the selected internal LF signals are configured and generator generator and the pulse generator activated on or off LF sweep is configured and Active sweep activated The internal pulse generator Active pulse generator is configured and activated Modulation The modulations are Active modulations MOD ON OFF configured and activated Switches the active modulation on or off The modulations are activated in the respective dialog boxes RF RF signal is configured and State of RF output RF ON OFF tivated Activated activate EES Switches the RF output on or off Mod Gen block LF VIDEO Gp G Iv The internal modulation sources are configured in this block The LF frequency sweep can be activated here and an internal LF generator is available as the internal source for the analog modulations AM FM and PHiM The used modulation shape is a sine wave signal The internal modulation generator signal is provided at the LF output on the front of the instrument The LF output signal and the modulations sources for th
112. 4077 62 3 18 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Editors Editors The R amp S SMC provides user friendly editors for defining lists Lists containing frequency and level value pairs are used for the user defined level correction The lists are saved to files and may thus have any length The file name of the lists and the directory to which the files are saved are user selectable The file prefix is different for each list type and is permanently assigned by the system see section File Management page 3 22 List Editor The User Correction menu provides the list editor for defining the frequency level value pairs The associated buttons call up the list editor Edit User Cor Data e The selected list is displayed If no list has been selected a blank list of only one row is displayed Edit User Correction Data smc mod e The value pairs are entered in the Frequency Hz and Power dBm table columns A blank row is inserted at the end of the list e New rows can be inserted anywhere in the table by means of the Insert Row s button e After the list has been edited i e changed it can be saved under its current name by means of the Save button or under a new name by means of the Save as button Only complete value pairs are taken into consideration rows containing an entry in only one column are ignored e An existing list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode e Anew list can be created under a new name ei
113. 5 Front D nmel sue ctis 1 1 Quo au UD IY MULUS 1 3 SEENEN 1 3 AITOW EE 1 5 BACK SPACE ee Been nins 1 3 CLOSE Cial aldo tada 1 7 Il Le 1 7 DiSplay i a ies 1 2 ENTER isa oie e 1 5 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Front panel O E A ation RA 1 7 FREQ tata e rd ee ge 1 3 Ee ebe 1 2 INFO hts edem eed ont 1 3 key emulaton 3 28 LEVEL oie 1 3 LP edel 1 6 LOCA cional viajo 1 2 MODEX Tosco 1 6 MOD ON OFF ccoccccoconcccnoccccnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnno 1 7 ON OFF LED acticin Hiei tod aaa 1 7 ON OFF switch iniinsiernad te 1 7 PRESE lesions nim 1 2 RE ON OFF ii n nein 1 7 RF OU 1 6 Rotary kmob nnn 1 5 SETUP Laie snl SIDA 1 2 Unit KeyS i xii edet 1 4 G Gate Input Polarity Pulse Modulation 4 99 6 85 Gated Signal Pulse Modulation 4 99 6 85 Gateway Setup 4 19 6 109 GET Group Execute Trigger 5 20 Get System Settings Setup 4 18 Getting started sss 2 1 H Hardware COM inci Ii erret 4 10 6 11 emor 240 si een dp e Rh 9 9 missing 241 9 9 A rr dons 4 12 6 6 revision out of date 201 9 20 Header diia baile 5 11 Header suffix out of range 114 9 9 Hostname Setup 4 18 1411 4060 32 Index l IEC IEEE bus address EN 4 21 6 105 command description 6 1 Interface namsevar ia i 1 10 Illegal parameter value 2324 9 10 Impedance RF outputs nnossenennnnneaanne
114. 5 No current list KN EE 9 15 This modulation forces other modulations OFF 140 9 15 Unknown list type specified GA7 9 15 IX 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Status Information and Messages 9 Error Messages Introduction Status Information and Messages This chapter describes the error messages of the signal generator The error messages are output in the Info line on the screen and entered in the error error event queue of the status reporting system A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen Some error messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The info window with a list of current messages and a detailed description of each message can be opened with the INFO key In the remote control mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned Status Information The status messages are displayed in the header section of the screen The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the signal generator The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user Status information is displayed between the frequen
115. 6 25 Import Export User Correction data 4 69 4 71 6 46 INFO Ko iii id 3 7 Input DUTTON ctas ean ae 5 19 INST TRIG i ee es 1 10 2 4 MOD EXT iier bates 1 6 PULSE EXT 1 10 4 95 6 80 REF IN d tete tet edite 1 10 Install SG Option 4 14 Instrument COlflO coooooocccnnnonicccccccnnccnnas 4 10 6 11 Instrument settings A atlas 4 29 4 38 6 6 6 21 A EE 4 27 4 36 6 7 6 22 CT 1 18 Instrument trigger input slope 4 86 4 106 6 57 Interface IEC IEEE bus 1 10 Interface function IEC IEEE bus 8 3 A a et 5 28 Invalid block data 767 9 10 Character 7071 9 10 EEPROM data 203 sss 9 20 filename extension 464 9 20 separator 103 sss 9 10 Suffix 131 iio ot ee 9 10 SE ele i e bete det 1 22 6 111 Setup tei p bna 4 19 6 109 Mode ZGetup 4 19 6 111 ISTMO s soie dig obi 6 6 E 1 Index K Key E EE 1 3 Era da di 1 4 MC dd e 1 3 ATTOWKOYS ii A au 1 5 BACK SPAGE aedi reed et 1 3 CLOSE 5 sa stis 1 7 combinations esses 3 27 UB Vela 1 4 DIAGR cuca rap NAR 1 7 ENTER coc eint ERR 1 5 LEE 1 7 EREQ e S EA se im 1 3 C II 1 4 HEEP e 1 2 4 34 INFO a a ai 1 3 KI sie Reve b edo 1 4 LEVEL eieiei eieiei ee 1 3 LOCAL usarla PRI 1 2 4 33 5 8 M Uc a In A itn al e e 1 4 MV tiae de d ae ot ete ate 1 4 MOD ON OFF a e a ara aa nennen 1 7 ON OFF switch sse 1 7 PRESET iie bein 1 2 1 18 4 6 RF ON OFF instet e enda 1 7 SETUP bi utet 1
116. 9 6 94 Span RF ween 4 78 6 55 Special characters cooooooccocccincoccccccnccnccincannnnnos 6 2 Square brackets 5 12 SRE service request enable register 5 26 SRQ service request ns nnssesinneeeeeenneeeenaa 6 7 Standby mode 1 7 Start el EE 4 78 6 55 Freq LF Zween 4 104 6 61 EA A aad 4 85 6 78 Power Sensors 6 28 Start Stop Gui Update 4 12 6 113 Startup complete n 6 117 State ALG E E tp er Rd 4 63 6 74 Power Sensors 4 52 Pulse Generator 4 107 Pulse Modulation 4 96 6 84 Pvideo Sync Signal 4 107 Test point 4 15 6 13 User Comechon irisi onae 4 65 6 48 Video Sync Signal suus 6 80 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Status register overview sssseeene 5 25 reporting gkvsfenm 5 24 reporting system commandqs 6 99 STB status byte ssssssssss 5 26 Step Level ZSween n 4 86 6 98 Step Lin EF SWeep exit ralla 4 105 6 66 RF Sweep 4 79 6 94 Step Log LF SWe6p AA oc Bh AS 4 105 6 66 ee EE 4 79 6 95 Step width Frequency sss 4 46 6 56 Level SWEEP cc cecccccecessscecceseseeeseeeees 4 86 6 98 RF Sweep 4 79 6 94 Stop Freq LF ween ii ems 4 104 6 61 RF SW66D i titi 4 78 6 56 Stop Level 4 85 6 79 String data not allowed 158 9 14 SNIS icons 5 17 Subnet Mask Setup 4 19 6 111 SUM ioni
117. A Resource Name My System E Devices and Interfaces 53 GPIEO PCI GPIB TCPIP 89 1 2 116 INSTR VISA resource identifier For this device r SMATE x i NOW amp y Ports Serial amp Parallel Ni deg mies e access es B a VISA Ethernet Devices ic Device er 7 evice was statica Enabled 1 Tells whether this device is enabled 141 BD Software Delete Host Address 89 1 2 118 Name of the host for this device wh Rename Opens a VISA session On the viWrite tab under Basic I O commands can be sent to the instrument instrument responses are displayed on the viRead tab for further program operation refer to the online help of the program E TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0x001AD688 viwiiteFromFile viReadToFile viwiite viRead vibssertTrigger viReadSTB viClear systemrerror all n El ml Return Count Aspne k 18 Return Value E 0 Write data to a message based bus or device 4 Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the LAN interface Manually 1 Press the LOCAL key Notes The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command amp LLO see Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is only possible via remote control The LOCAL key can be enabled again by the interface message amp NREN see
118. AN STOP STARt Compliant SOURce FREQuency STARt 300 kHz RF max RFmax depending on model This command sets the start frequency for the sweep mode STARt can be greater than STOP This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ CENT and SOUR FREQ SPAN i e changing these values causes the STARt value to change and vice versa STARt CENTer SPAN 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the Of fset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if offset is set to 0 The value range for other Offset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 kHz Offset RF max Offset Example FREQ STARt 1 MHz sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz FREQ STOP 2 GHz sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz Correlation SCPI 100 MHz STARt CENTer SPAN 2 Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 47 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0 Hz RFmax 100 kHz The command sets the step width for the frequency setting if the frequency values UP DOWN are used and variation mode SOUR FREQ STEP MODE USER is selected The command is linked to Variation Step for manual control i e the command also sets the step width of the rotary knob for Variation Active on Example FREQ STEP 50 kHz sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50
119. C generator the LOCAL key is disabled The key is disabled by remote control with the interface message LLO When switching from remote control to manual control the display update suppression function if active SETUP GUI Update is O is automatically deactivated sETUP GUI Update is On Messages Info Key The INFO key opens a window containing a detailed description of every message displayed in the info bar see chapter 3 section Info and Status Bar and chapter 9 section Error Messages 1411 4060 32 4 31 E 4 Help System Help Key R amp S SMC100A Help System Help Key The HELP key opens a browser window containing a context sensitive description of the highlighted parameter Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings Remote control command RST anil The context sensitive page which is opened with the HELP key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system The following navigation aids are available e Contents link The Contents link calls up the contents list The contents list is used to open the individual
120. C100A Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate MACaddress The command queries the MAC address of the network adapter The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM NETW MAC queries the MAC address SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource The command queries the visa resource string This string is used for remote control of the instrument The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM NETW RES queries the VISA resource string Response TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM USB RES queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 72 000000 INSTR SCPI Device specific SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt The command sets the date for the instrument internal calendar Example SYST DATE 2003 05 01 sets May 1 2003 SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 93 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON OFF The command switches the update of the display on off A switchover from remote control to manual control always sets the status of the update of the display to ON Example SYST DIS
121. DATA POWer 40 dB 6dB 40 dB 6 dB SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts LL Query only SOURce CORRection CSET DATA SENSor POWer SONCe Noquery Noquery SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog PY Query only SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension TXT CSV SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect ASCII file name gt SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe SOURce p DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal DOT COMMa SOURce CORRection DEXChange MODE IMPort EXPort SOURce CORRection DEXChange SELect lt ucorfile gt SOURce CORRection CSET SELect lt tablename SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF Query only 1411 4060 32 6 33 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog The command requests a list of user correction tables The individual lists are separated by commas The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR This command is a query command and has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor selects the directory for the user correction files CORR CSET CAT queries which correction tables are available Response UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 the correction tables UCOR1 UCOR2 and UCOR3 are available
122. DEG Reset Delta Phase Resets delta phase value The set phase is adopted as the new Display RF Phase current phase i e the delta phase value is reset to 0 Remote control command SOUR PHAS REF 1411 4060 32 4 43 E 4 RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator RES SMC100A RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator In the internal reference mode the internal reference signal is available at the REF OUT connector rear of instrument The frequency of the internal reference signal is fixed to 10 MHz External impairment is possible in both Adjustment State states On or Off For EFC Electronic Frequency Control e g in phase noise measurement systems external FM modulation DC coupling in low noise mode is used FM DC mode yields a fixed tuning sensitivity which is independent from the set RF output frequency The tuning sensitivity is equal to the set FM deviation In the external reference mode an external signal with selectable frequency and defined level must be input at the REF IN connector This signal is output at the REF OUT connector The EXT REF status message appears in the display header Note The setting of the reference oscillator are not influenced by an instrument preset PRESET key Reference Oscillator Menu The Reference Oscillator menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF Frequency Phase NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Aut
123. E AUTO in combination with TRIG FSW SOUR SING The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example SWE FREQ MODE AUTO sets the triggered sweep mode i e a trigger is required to start the sweep TRIG FSW SOUR SING sets the Single trigger mode i e a trigger starts a single sweep TRIG FSW starts a single RF frequency sweep Device specific TRIGger FSWeep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle EXTernal BUS EAUTo The command sets the trigger source for the RF frequency sweep The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate SINGle Single mode EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command SWEep FREQ MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As Soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGIe One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SWEep FREQ EXEC or TRG Or TRIG FSW IMM The mode has to be
124. Example FREQ STOP 2 GHz sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz FREQ STAR 1 MHz sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz Resolution Correlation SCPI 500 MHz STOP CENTer SPAN 2 Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 48 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce INPut Subsystem The SOURce INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for external pulse modulation signals The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps Instrument Trigger Command Parameters Default unit SOURce INPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative d m SOURce INPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command sets the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal at the INST TRIG inputs BNC connector at the rear of the instrument The setting is effective for both inputs at the same time Example INP TRIG SLOP NEG the active slope of the external trigger signal at the INST TRIG inputs is the falling slope SOURce LFOutput Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and Sweep mode as well as for analog modulations An LF sweep is set in several steps which are shown in the following example 1 Set the sweep range LFOutput FREQuency STARt 4 kHz LFOutput FREQuency STOP 10 kHz 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN 3 Set the step width and dwell time LFOu
125. I Compliant MMEMory MSIS lt msus gt The command is without effect for the Linux operating system of R amp S SMC SCPI Compliant MMEMory RDIRectory directory name The command deletes the specified subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM RDIR carrier deletes the subdirectory carrier in the current directory SCPI Device specific MMEMory STORe STATe 4 lt file_name gt This command stores the current instrument setting in the specified file The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number using the common command SAV The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 VAR RS GEN TEST1 savrcl stores the current instrument setting in the file test1 savrcl in the USER directory on the internal flash memory SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 19 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut system contains the commands which set the properties of the RF output connector The properties of the LF output connector are set in the SOURce LFOutput system see section SOU
126. IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of IP address DHCP in order to use this function Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE AUTO Static The IP address is assigned manually Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE STAT Peer to Peer A Peer to Peer connection is used Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE P2P Only for Static and Peer to Peer mode Enters the IP address manually The new entry is only accepted and the IP address changed after the Accept button is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD 7 8 9 10 Only for Static and Peer to Peer mode Enters the Subnet mask This number is used together with the IP address to identify the network segment the instrument is in The new entry is only accepted and the subnet mask changed after the Accept button is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SUBN MASK 255 255 255 0 Only for Static mode Enters the IP address of the default gateway The new entry is only accepted and the default gateway is changed after the Accept button is pressed This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to forward ttraffic to destinations beyond the local network Remote control command SYST COMM IPAD NETW GAT 456 4 18 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings DNS Server Address Mode
127. Info line RFSweep LevelSweep LFSweep ALC On Auto S amp H 1411 4060 32 The indicated sweep is enabled The status of the automatic level control is indicated ON automatic level control permanently on Auto automatic level control is automatically adapted to the operating states S amp H automatic level control off recalibration of the level whenever the level or frequency is set sample and hold mode 9 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Error Messages AttFixed Attenuator fixed mode is active The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated The range is displayed under Attenuator Fixed Range in the Level menu UCorr User Correction is active The level is corrected by the given values in the selected user correction list Correction is performed by the user defined list values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values OvenCold The reference oscillator has not yet reached its nominal frequency When switching on from the STANDBY mode the specified frequency accuracy is reached immediately If the power switch was switched off the reference oscillator needs some warm up time to reach its nominal frequency During this period of time the output f
128. Manual Wu Um li ty i ii Wu TPL Te i Mg Mud Wei d Mi M TESSE T m id EE EOE D 3 ALC Auto Signal Generator R amp S SMC100A 1411 4002K02 Test Equipment Depot 1 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 Phone 781 665 1400 Toll Free 1 800 517 8431 e ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement 1411 4060 32 01 Dear Customer throughout this manual the Signal Generator R amp S SMC100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMC The firmware of the instrument makes use of the operating system LINUX and other valuable open source software packages The most important of them are listed below together with their corresponding open source license The verbatim license texts are provided on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Package Link License LINUX Kernel http www linux org GPL 2 gLibc http www gnu org software libc LGPL busybox http www busybox net GPL 2 OpenSSL http www openssl org OpenSSL SSLeay XFree86 http Awww xfree86 org XFree86 Xitami http www xitami com NetSnmp 5 0 8 PHP http www php net 2 5b6 OpenSSL http www openssl org BSD BOOST Library http www boost org Artistic zlib http www zlib net Boost Software v 1 PC SC Lite http www linuxnet com ACE TAO The OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org includes cryptographic software written by Eric Youn
129. ODE MAN Here only frequency values between the settings SOUR FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR FREQ MAN command As with the Frequency value entered in the header the Of fset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if Offset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formula see also Chapter 4 STARt Offset STOP tOffset Example SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode FREQ MAN 500MHz sets an RF frequency of 500 MHz for the next step in the Step sweep mode FREQ MODE SWE sets the Frequency Sweep mode An RF frequency of 500 MHz is output FREQ MAN 550MHz triggers the next sweep step with an RF frequency of 550 MHz 100 MHz Compliant SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output frequency Parameters CW FIXed The instrument operates in fixed frequency mode CW and FIXed are synonyms The output frequency is set with SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The frequency is set using the commands SOURce FREQuency STARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual Example FREQ MODE SWE sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce FREQu
130. ODE SWE the frequency is linked to the sweep frequency Example LFO2 FREQ 5kHz sets the frequency of the LF generator 2 signal to 5 kHz LFO FREQ for LFO FREQ MODE Compliant SWE linked to sweep frequency 1411 4060 32 6 50 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz 1 MHz In Sweep mode SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE the command sets the frequency for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR LFO SWE MODE MAN Here only frequency values between the settings SOUR LFO FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR LFO FREQ MAN command Example FO SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode FO FREQ MAN 5 kHz sets an LF frequency of 5 kHz for the next step in the Step sweep mode FO FREQ MODE SWE sets the LF Sweep mode An LF frequency of 5 kHz is output FO FREQ MAN 5 1 kHz triggers the next sweep step with a frequency of 5 1 kHz SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep The command sets the instrument LF operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output frequency Parameters CW FIXed The instrument operates in fixed frequency mode CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is set with SOURce LFOutput FREQuency SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The frequency is set usin
131. OI only a character which is sent simultaneously with the line message EOI is accepted as the terminator SCPI STANdard Compliant SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 30 The command sets the IEC IEEE bus address Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 14 sets IEC IEEE bus address 14 SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 88 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname string The command enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMC The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW COMM SET Note The hostname can only be changed after deactivating protection level 1 command SYSTem PROTect n STATe OFF password Example SYST COMM NETW HOST SMC enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMC SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates the change of the hostname SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon SET The command activates the hostname setting Command SYST COMM NETW COMM HOST The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW COMM SET activates a change of the hostname SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS ALTernate 0 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF The command sets the alternate DNS server address manually Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT the DNS server address i
132. P UPD OFF switches update of displayed parameter values off SCPI Device specific SYSTem ERRor ALL The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see section Error Messages If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem FPReset The command triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery This includes also the parameters that are unchanged when executing a regular Preset with the RST command e g IEC IEEEE bus address However password settings and all settings protected by these password are not changed e g disabled USB connections LAN settings and reference oscillator setting The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST FPR all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to the factory values SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 94 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is r
133. PC and WAT OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR Setting bit O in the ESE after all previous commands have been Setting bit 5 in the SRE executed Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is Sending OPC directly after the command whose returned This is only the case after the processing should be terminated before other commands Operation Complete bit has been set in the can be executed ESR This bit indicates that the previous Disabling bit 4 MAV of the SRE register setting has been completed Alternative Service request or timeout method with enabled MAV bit see below WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command whose processing commands sent before WAI have been should be terminated before other commands are executed executed Note While waiting it is still possible to send messages to the device Command synchronization by means of a WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the R amp S signal generator to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1
134. Password VNC Confirm New Password VNC Old password Security New Password Security Confirm New Password Security USB Device Security LAN Connection Security Security Password 1411 4060 32 Enters the new password The VNC password is required for remote access to the instrument via Ultr VNC see chapter 1 The default password is instrument Remote control commands n a Enters the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enters the currently used password Default is 123456 The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface Remote control commands n a Enters the new password Only numerics are permitted Remote control commands n a Enters the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enables disables the USB interfaces Any device connected to the USB interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enables disables the LAN interfaces Any device connected to the LAN interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The setting require
135. Phase Modulation Menu The Phase Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the SETUP key under Mod Amplitude Mod Frequency Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources Phase Modulation PhiM Source Int PhiM Deviation 1 000 00 rad PhiM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz y State PhiM Activates deactivates PhiM modulation Activation of PhiM deactivates frequency modulation Remote control command SOUR PM STAT ON PhiM Source Selects the source for the PhiM signal Int Selects the internal source for PhiM modulation Remote control command SOUR PM SOUR INT Ext Selects the external source for analog phase modulation The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PM SOUR EXT 1411 4060 32 4 86 E 1 R amp S SMC100A PhiM Deviation PhiM Sensitivity PhiM External Coupling LF Gen Freq PhiM 1411 4060 32 Phase Modulation PhiM Sets the modulation deviation in RAD The maximal deviati
136. Questionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit SCPI Compliant STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see Chapter 9 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SYSTem ERRor Example STAT QUE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 86 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SYSTem Subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation Command Parameters Default unit A A A EOI E Jo SYSTen COMMuniesleNETWoA COMMon HOSTrame ag systencomineasneTwancommenser gt mem aerer COMManeae NETMAKONS MODE statero J SYsTemCOMMuncaNETWokDNSP
137. REFemd 0000 FFFFFFFF SYSTenCOMMunesIeNETWoRONSSET JL oy SYSTenCOMMunealeNETWoRGET O oy SYSTenCOMMunieaIeNETWoRIPADGESS 0000 pererere J 7 SYSTenCOMMuniesIONETWoREIPADSSSIGATeay ag SYSTenCOMMuniesIeNETWoRIPADSressMODE Lamera J EI JL Lea EE EE EE EE C SYSTem COMMunieateNETWorcRESowes EE AIN A omm ESCHER CA CU O ES CI A A CTE AI A dy EA A A evo CA A A vo CA A A Leen CI A A Lienen CN UTA A CN A A L nsen CI A A Lean E UA 1 SSremsem A ew SremsmmupGoweas A vo Ssrewmwe EI EE Leere 1411 4060 32 6 87 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF The command switches the key beep on or off Example SYST BEEP STAT O no acoustic signal is output when a key on the front panel is pressed SCPI Compliant SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI STANdard The command sets the terminator recognition for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus Parameters EOI The terminator must be sent together with the line message EOI End of Line This setting is recommended for binary block transmissions where a character could coincidentally have the value LF Line Feed but is not intended as the terminator This setting must be selected for block data with undefined length STANdard An LF Line Feed is recognized as the terminator regardless of whether it is sent with or without EOI Example SYST COMM GPIB LTER E
138. Rce LFOutput Subsystem O pem 00 me rem eeneg umma eem PORTER wwemoemue 00 em Ee REES wwe mw EE emmmer CS A OUTPut AMODe AUTO NORMal The command switches the mode of the attenuator at the RF output Attenuator MODe Parameters AUTO The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range FIXed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed in its current position and the resulting variation range is defined Example POW ALC ON activates automatic level control for RF output OUTP AMOD FIX sets the fixed mode with uninterrupted level for the RF output 1411 4060 32 6 20 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer The command queries the minimum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FIXed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP AFIX RANG LOW queries the minimum level for the FIXed setting Response 50 the minimum level is 50 dBm Device specific OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer The command queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FIXed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP AFIX RANG UPP queries the maximum level for the FIXed setting for the RF output Respons
139. S SMC Function Check The signal generator automatically monitors the main functions when the instrument is switched on and continuously during operation If a fault is detected ERROR is displayed in the info line together with a brief error description For in depth identification of the error press the INFO key In response a description of the error s is displayed see chapter 9 Error Messages Besides automatic monitoring of instrument functions other capabilities in the R amp S SMC ensure correct functioning of the signal generator Internal Adjustments Adjustments can be performed in the Setup System Internal Adjustments menu Thus optimum modulation performance can be obtained for instance Self Test Internal test points are queried by the instruments firmware and checked for correct values See chapter 4 section Selftest 1411 4077 62 1 15 E 1 Default Settings RES SMC100A Default Settings The instrument is set to a defined state with the PRESET key With PRESET all parameters and switch states are preset including those of deactivated operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g IEC IEEE bus address or reference oscillator source settings Note Resetting the instrument to the factory state is po
140. S SMC is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network How to connect the signal generator to the network is described in chapter 1 section Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN NOTICE Risk of network errors Connecting errors may affect the entire network We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the network administrator G IS Restart Network Hostname rssmc100a100003 MAC Address oo 90 b8 19 6d 36 IP Address Address Mode Auto DHCP y IP Address 010 111 010 240 Subnet Mask 255 255 000 000 Default Gateway 010 111 000 001 Accept DNS Server Settings Address Mode Auto DHCP y Preferred DNS Server 166 002 000 010 Alternate DNS Server 159 023 000 010 Accept The menu is divided into the sections Common Settings where the general network environment is defined IP Address section where the specific identification of the computer in the network is defined and DNS Server Settings where the DNS server is entered New entries are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Network Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings Settings accordingly Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET SYST COMM NETW COMM SET SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET 1411 4060 32 4 16 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings The indications of the menu are o
141. SMC is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator the instrument can be remote controlled and remote accessed in the network Remote access means that the user can operate the R amp S SMC from any remote PC in the network using the VNC protocoll For instance the user can control one or more R amp S SMCs from a desk that is part of a test assembly located in another section of the building A VNC client programm for Windows operating systems is provided on the R amp S SMC CD ROM included in delivery VNC client programms for other operating systems are available free of charge on the internet Remote control of the instrument via the LAN interface is described in chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface The configuration of the R amp S SMC for networking is performed in the Environment section of the Setup menu Connection to the Network NOTICE Risk of network errors Connecting errors may affect the entire network We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the network administrator The instrument is connected to the LAN with the aid of a commercial RJ 45 cable suitable for a 10 100Mbps connection attached to the LAN interface on the rear of the instrument The connector is described in chapter 8 Maintenance and Interfaces Configuring the R
142. SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN 0 5E4 SOUR FREQ MAN 1E6 The value entered with command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR FREQ MAN has no effect the command only triggers the next sweep step However the value has to be in the currently set sweep range start to stop In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single sweep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR EXT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger 4 69 E 4 Sweep Mode 1411 4060 32 Extern Step Extern Start Stop R amp S SMC100A Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Step swe
143. STATe static eec nM 6 50 SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed sss senes nennen nna 6 53 SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed RCL esistente tenente nna 6 53 TSOURco ee RRE 6 51 SOURce FREQu ency MANUu dl i ceres ee ed hd M dnte e dude d XU Ra E ugue 6 54 SOURce FREQuency MODE 2 dt a ded re ee E a RP 6 54 L OUb ceEbREOuenck OPE Get 6 55 1411 4060 32 10 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Commands S ISOURce IEREQUGORCVSPAN iuto ein auteni 6 55 SOURCGe EREQuency S T ARI d Rr a e REA RA 6 55 SOURce FREQuency S TEP NCRement sess sesenta nns 6 56 TSOURc JFRE Quenec V STER MODE essen enne nnns nr rr rra rr sanare 6 56 L OUb ceEhREOuenck STOP 6 56 SOURCe JINPut RiGoer SL Ope sessanta santet etas sinas sentent 6 57 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SHAPe sse 6 64 SQURce EFOUtpuUtF S TATe iiie ERE A t e dde E b e 6 61 SOURce LFOutput FREQuency sisse seien enne nennen nnns ants neant sanare enne nnn 6 58 SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MANual sisse sesenta nnne nennen nena e nennen nns 6 60 TSOURce JLF Output FREQUene y MODE eene nennen enne ES EEEE nnns enne nnn nnn 6 60 L OUb ce H FOutputFR Ouenck START 6 61 L OUb ce H FOutputFR Ouenck STOP 6 61 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELI sse 6 62 SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute sss nnns 6 62 SOURce LFOutput
144. SWEep FREQuency DWELI inei idiren pia ersari seen nennen nennen nennen nannten enn nnn nn 6 90 SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECUute esses iai iiir nennen nnn nn 6 90 L OUb celSWEeottbREOuencxvtMODt senes enne nnns nnns enne nna 6 91 PSOURce JSWEep FRE Quenec y POINGS esee nennen nennen nnne enne nn 6 92 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SHAPe sss enne nnne nnne nennen nnne nn 6 92 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing sisse seen nennen nnne enn 6 94 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear sss eee 6 94 SOURce SWEep FREQuency S TEP LOGarithmic sese 6 95 SOURce I SWEep POWOer DWELI 5 rites Ht ie HERR LEE HERR LL A RE ER de 6 95 SOURce SWEep POWer EXEQCUte eiiis i sessi a a a ERR 222 A AR 2 222 A MAR R RR A erat 6 96 SOURce SWEep POWer MODBE sisse cnn 6 96 SOURce SWEep POWer POINISs esses essentiae nnne nnne nee nannten nna 6 97 SOURce SWEep POWer SHAP e sisse e nnne nennen sense nsn nna 6 97 1411 4060 32 10 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Commands S L OUlbcel iWtep PDOlder GPACmmgo MODEN esistere enhn entera enn enne 6 97 SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic sss eene 6 98 STATus OPERation CONDition cooociccconioninnnconccinccncn a nnne nennen senes enn nnn sanete nnns 6 100 STATus OPERalion ENABle ig a esta abe 6 100 STATUS OPP Rat ON E BVENI ee
145. Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generator Set instrument to manual operation 1411 4060 32 5 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Interface and Device Messages Remote Control via USB Interface The PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed on the controller VISA will detect and configure the R amp S SMC automatically when the USB connection is established No entry of an address string and no separate driver installation is necessary The used USB address string is USB lt vendor Id gt lt product Id serial number gt INSTR OxOAAD is the vendor Id for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x54 is the product Id for R amp S SMC and the serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument Example USB 0x0AAD 0x0054 100001 INSTR Interface and Device Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus see Section EC IEEE Bus Interface or via a TCP IP network can be divided into two groups e interface messages and e device messages Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of an IEC IEEE bus controller Interface commands can be further subdivided into e unive
146. TARt and STOP value is retained Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN LOG The command is always effective for the currently set sweep spacing 1411 4060 32 6 54 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description Example FO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 2 kHz FO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz FO SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing FO SWE POIN 11 sets 11 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 2 KHz Correlation The value of Device specific LFO SWE STEP is adjusted adapted to instrument automatically properties SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SOURce LF1 LF2 The command selects the source for the LFsweep Example SWE LFS LF2 selects LF generator 2 as the LF frequency sweep source Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SHAPe SAWTooth TRlangle The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence shape Parameters SAWTooth One sweep runs from start to stop frequency Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency i e the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth TRlangle One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back i e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency Example SOUR LFO SWE SHAP TRI
147. TER key or a toggle ON OFF key if available Press Enter key Click check box or button 1411 4077 62 3 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Setting Parameters Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters Some menus are organized in areas The cursor can be moved either only within an area or between the higher level menu areas This applies to the File Select menus when files are saved or loaded When the menu is called one of the menu areas is highlighted by a blue frame New User Correction Data ls recent data sets New User Correction Data recent data sets File Name File Name smc mod smc mod File File Sues Manager 7 SR Manager EI e Another menu area can be selected highlighted by means of the rotary knob or the arrow keys e Clicking the rotary knob Enter moves the cursor to the highlighted menu area When the cursor is placed on a lower level area in the menu the area is highlighted by a grey frame The currently selected item is printed on a blue background in the example the selected directory The rotary knob and the arrow keys up down move the cursor only within the grey framed area New User Correction Data recent data sets File Name EE E File Manager E e Clicking the rotary knob Enter terminates the setting i e selection of a file The cursor is either set on the next higher menu level or the menu is closed as
148. V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under FM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Note The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 V otherwise modulation distortions might occur Remote control command SOUR FM SENS Response 1E3 Starts the adjustment for the FM PhiM modulator The option is adjusted with respect to DC offset Remote control command CAL FMOF CAL FMOF Source External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal Remote control command SOUR FM EXT COUP AC DC The modulation signal is dc coupled Remote control command SOUR FM EXT COUP DC Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 4 85 E 4 Phase Modulation PhiM R amp S SMC100A Phase Modulation PhiM An internal or external source can be selected for phase modulation A LF modulation generator is available as internal sources The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Note It is not possible to use phase modulation simultaneously with frequency modulation
149. With the level sweep the logarithmic step width is a constant fraction of the current level This fraction is added to the current level The logarithmic step width is entered in dB Remote control command SOUR SWE POW STEP 3 Enters the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command SOUR SWE POW DWEL 10ms Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger This setting affects the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG 4 79 E 4 Modulations R amp S SMC100A Modulations The R amp S SMC Signal Generator provides amplitude modulation AM frequency modulation FM phase modulation PM and pulse modulation In addition the RF signal can be modulated with internal modulations waveforms The modulations are available for the basic unit R amp S SMC frequency option R amp S SMC B10x without additional equipment options A standard LF generator is provided for internal modulation Settings for the modulation are made in separate modulation menus These menus can be acces
150. a Minimum level Offset Maximum level Offset The keywords of this command are largely optional Therefore both the long and short form of the command are shown in the example 1411 4060 32 6 62 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 15 or POW 15 sets the RF level at output A to 15 dBm Compliant SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 100 dB 100 dB Caution The level offset is also effective for level sweeps The command specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator amplifier If a level offset is entered the level entered with POWer no longer corresponds to the RF output level The following correlation applies POWer RF output level POWer Offset Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but rather the query value of POWer Only dB is permitted as the unit here The linear units V W etc are not permitted The keywords of this command are largely optional Therefore both the long and short form of the command are shown in the example Example SOUR POW LEV IMM Off 10 or POW OFFS 10 sets the RF level offset to 10 dB Compliant SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines whether the current leve
151. about specifications and character istics of the instrument Chapter 1 describes the control elements and connec tors on the front and rear panel as well as all procedures required for putting the in strument into operation Chapter 2 gives an introduction to the operating con cept and typical applications of the R amp S SMC Chapter 3 describes key operating modes the struc ture of the graphical interface and the prin ciples of manual control 1411 4060 32 0 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A User Documentation Internet Site 1411 4060 32 Chapter 4 forms a reference for manual control of the R amp S SMC and contains a detailed descrip tion of all instrument functions and their ap plication The chapter also lists the remote control command corresponding to each in strument function Remote Control Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Annex describes the basics for programming the R amp S SMC command processing and the status reporting system lists all the remote control commands de fined for the instrument describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument s inter faces gives the status messages and a list of er ror messages that the R amp S SMC may gen erate lists the remote control commands in al phabetical order and contains an index of the operating manual Service Manual Instrument The service manual instrument informs on how to
152. ace and Device Messages 5 9 Interface Messages c entente hehe dnb REEE n Reed n 5 9 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses 5 10 SCPI Command Structure and Gvntan 5 11 Structure of a Command Line sassessessesssirreserreesrerrerenniesianesenennerennns 5 13 Responses to Queries i metr r en etaa ea a aL LATEA KP aaas 5 14 Parameters do tous 5 15 Overview of Syntax Elements sssssseeen 5 17 Instrument Model and Command Processing sseeeene 5 18 A T DE DR 5 18 Command Recoonttion ener 5 19 Database and Instrument Hardware ssesseeeese 5 19 Status Reporting Gvsiem 5 20 Output Unit reete eet aste hee e deed 5 20 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 5 21 Status Reporting System eee esent nennen 5 23 Overview of the Status Register 5 24 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 25 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE 5 25 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 5 26 Application of the Status Reporting System ssssesnsseeesennnen neee 5 27 Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems neeeeeeeeeeeee 5 28 1411 4060 32 V 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Remote Control Basics 5 Remote Control Basics Introduction Remote Control Basics This chapter provides e Instructions
153. adlocked 430 sssssesseeennen 9 10 1411 4060 32 IX 1 E 1 Contents Error Messages R amp S SMC100A 1411 4060 32 Self test failed 330 1 cccccsccecdeceeeeteceeeeeseeeeeeseeceeseeeeeereneeceaenseeees 9 10 Settings conflict 221 cc ccccceesceceecenceceeeeseceneesseeneneeeneecevenseeerseeses 9 10 String data not allowed 7188 9 10 Suffix not allowed 71381 9 10 Suffix too long 134 tete eed dene 9 11 Syntax error 102 ici cid 9 11 Systenretror 310 ia 9 11 Too many digits 124 9 11 Tooimuch data 229 nit tec idad 9 11 Undefined header 113 ooonocccoconicicnnacocannnonarcnnnannnrnnnnnnrrannnarecannnnners 9 11 Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages 9 12 Extern reference out of range or disconnected 50 9 12 Adjustment data invalid 183 sss 9 12 Adjustment data missing 182 sse 9 12 Adjustment failed 180 1 9 13 Cannot access the EEPROM OO 9 13 Cannot access hardware 200 9 13 Cannot open file 460 9 13 Cannot read file 462 9 13 Cannot write file O61 n 9 14 Driver initialization failed 204 se 9 14 File contains invalid data App 9 14 Filename missing 463 sse 9 14 Hardware revision out of date OU 9 14 Invalid EEPROM data OO 9 15 Invalid filename extension 464 sss 9 1
154. age 4 92 e LF Output section LF Output Menu page 4 98 1411 4060 32 4 5 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Overview of General Instrument Settings The section General Instrument Settings describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation Most of these settings can only be accessed by means of menus which are opened using the front panel key The general instrument settings affect various functions such as storing instrument settings or setting the IEC IEEE bus address in the setup menu using the SETUP key The order in which the descriptions are given corresponds to the layout of the keys on the front panel of the R amp S SMC from top left to bottom right Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g IEC IEEE bus address or reference oscillator source settings Note Resetting the instrument to the factory state is possible in the Factory Preset Setup Settings menu Remote control command RST When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrum
155. ailable as internal sources In case of external source the external signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector at the rear of the instrument In case of internal source this connector can be used as external trigger or gate signal input for internal pulse modulation The polarity of the connector can be selected The pulse signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument Note The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMC is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hola In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after each frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Pulse Modulation Menu The Pulse Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the SETUP key under Mod Amplitude Mod Frequency Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu External y Normal State Pulse Activates deactivates pulse modulation Modulation When the internal modulation source pulse generator i
156. aining data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI 1411 4060 32 5 20 E 1 RES SMC100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Sequence and Command Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands e An overlapped command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Overlapped commands allow the program to do other tasks while being executed e Asequential command is one which always finishes before the next command starts executing Sequential commands are not implemented in the generator however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential commands If a particular device action can be performed only after the execution of a previous overlapped command the controller must know when the overlapped command has finished The necessary interaction between the controller and the test instrument is called command synchronization Command Sequence According to section Database and Instrument Hardware overlapped execution is possible in principle for all commands of the signal generator Equally setting commands within one command line are not necessarily serviced
157. alid for this file type If the file extension is changed the lists are no longer recognized and the data are therefore invalid Example The extension of a waveform file wv was changed to txt SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Filename missing 463 The desired operation cannot be execute because the file name is not specified Example A file name has to be entered when creating a new list SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Hardware revision out of date 201 A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected Example The driver does not support the installed version of a module SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages Invalid EEPROM data 203 Reading a EEPROM is possible however the data are inconsistent SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Invalid filename extension 464 The file extension is not valid for the desired operation Example The file extension for user correction files is uco It is not possible to enter another file extension when storing a user correction file SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register No current list 241 There is no list selected To execute the desired operation a list has to be selected in the related menu
158. alker and receives incomplete data SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 9 E 1 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Query deadlocked 430 This query cannot be processed Example The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot be operated SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Self test failed 330 An error was detected in the selftest named after the semicolon An error free operation of the module concerned is no longer guaranteed SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Settings conflict 221 There is a setting conflict between the two parameters indicated after the semicolon Example The set FM deviation is too large for the selected RF frequency Remedy One of the given values has to be corrected to obtain a valid output signal SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register String data not allowed 158 The command contains a legal string data element which is not allowed at this point Example A text parameter is set in quotation marks SOURce FREQuency MODE FIXed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Suffix not allowed 138 A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this point of the command Example Command RCL does not permit indicating a suffix SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register
159. alls the next menu level Setting Parameters Activates the editing mode for highlighted numeric and alphanumeric parameters Terminates a data entry the new value is set In case of numeric parameters the unit indicated next to the value in the menu applies Switches highlighted status parameters on and OFF ON OFFstate Confirms OK and closes message windows 5 Keys for settings and navigation in the display and for setting parameters Keys for settings and navigation in the display and See chapter 3 section for setting parameters Setting Parameters A Rotary knob Varies the value at a cursor position For frequency and level entry a fixed step width can be set and activated for the variation Moves the entry cursor in the block diagram or menu Moves the cursor in tables and selection lists Clicking the rotary knob Enter terminates entries In this case the entry mode is terminated and the value set Keys for setting and navigation in the display and See chapter 3 section for setting parameters Setting Parameters Arrow keys SE Vary the entry value or highlight a selected list item in the editing mode Highlight parameters in menus and tables up down Move the cursor in the entry fields editing mode Highlight parameters in menus and tables left right 1411 4077 62 1 5 E 1 Legend for Front Panel View R amp S SMC100A 6 RF output lt RF 50 OQ
160. ally adapted to the new unit Adjustment Active lv Check box field If the check box is ticked the associated parameter setting is active e g switched on FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz Menu area Several fields of associated but separately set parameters can be organized in a menu area The menu area is framed and labelled with the function common to all parameters e g FM Source Execute Single Sweep User Cor Data 1411 4077 62 Buttons The buttons either trigger a single action e g Execute Single Sweep or call the next menu level to be identified by 3 dots e g User Correction Data 3 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Setting Parameters Setting Parameters The R amp S SMC offers several and sometimes alternative possibilities for setting parameters Operation is possible from the front panel with the aid of a mouse and or from a PC keyboard Operation of the R amp S SMC with the aid of these control media is shown in the tables below Frequency and level are directly set in the header area of the display using the FREQ and LEVEL keys Some of the keys trigger a direct action e g the RF ON OFF key switches the RF output on and off An overview of key functions can be found at the end of this chapter see section Legend of Front Panel Controls page 3 26 a detailed description of key functions is given in chapter 4 Instrument F
161. amp S SMC for Network Operation The network interface functions with 10 100Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured For data exchange in a LAN each connected PC or instrument must be accessible via an IP address or via an unambiguous computer name In the Environment Network Settings section of the Setup menu three modes of assigning the IP address or computer name can be selected The correct mode selection depends on the setup of the network 1411 4077 62 1 18 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN Networks using DHCP The R amp S SMC is preconfigured for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol In these networks an available IP address is automatically assigned to the R amp S SMC The R amp S SMC provides an unambiguous computer name in the network via the DHCP request The DHCP server in the network must consider this name and pass it to the DNS server in order to ensure that the R amp S SMC can be addressed in the network Each R amp S SMC is assigned an individual computer name in the factory This name can be queried and changed in Environment Network Settings section of the Setup menu The mode setting is Auto DHCP Networks using fixed IP addresses In networks using fixed IP addresses the addresses are mostly assigned by the network administrator A fixed IP address must be entered in the Environment Network Set
162. amp S SMC100A Execute Single Sweep LF Sweep Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR SING SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ EXEC The sweep range sweep spacing dwell time and the external trigger slope are set in the bottom section Start Freq LF Sweep Stop Freq LF Sweep Current Freq LF Sweep Spacing LF Sweep 1411 4060 32 Sets the start frequency Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ STAR 100kHz Sets the stop frequency Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ STOP 50kHz Displays the current frequency If Step is set the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ MAN 15 kHz Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN LOG 4 96 E 1 R amp S SMC100A LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block Shape LF Sweep Step Lin Log LF Sweep 1411 4060 32 Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence shape f Sawtooth Triangle stop frequency start frequency stop frequency start frequency sawtooth shape triangle shape One sweep runs from start to stop frequency Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency i e the shape of th
163. amp S SMC100A The user documentation describes the Signal Generator R amp S SMC and all options It includes a printed Quick Start Guide and a CD ROM with the complete operating and service manual in printable pdf format and the data sheet The R amp S SMC is equipped with a context sensitive online help that offers a help page for each instru ment function Quick Start Guide The present quick start guide describes everything that is needed to put the instrument into operation and to get familiar with the generator The quick start guide gives an introduction to remote control and manual control via external monitor mouse and key board The quick start guide is subdivided into 4 chapters plus index Chapter 1 describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well as all proce dures required for putting the instrument into operation Chapter 2 gives an introduction the operating concept and typical applications of the R amp S SMC Chapter 3 describes key operating modes the structure of the graphical interface and the principles of manual control Annex contains an index for the quick start guide Help System The help system is embedded in the instrument offering quick context sensitive reference to the information needed for opera tion and programming The help contains the complete user documentation for the Signal Generator including the contents of the present quick start guide The
164. and irrespective the value entered there STEP Each external trigger triggers one sweep step only Mode Extern Step The frequency increases by the value entered under SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing Example SWE MODE AUTO selects auto mode for a frequency sweep 1411 4060 32 6 76 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in an RF sweep The command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency STEP as follows The following applies for linear sweeps POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN LOG The command is always effective for the currently set sweep spacing Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing SWE POIN 401 sets 401 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 1 MHz Resolution Correlation Th
165. and is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS POW SVER queries the software version of the R amp S NRP power sensor SENSe POWer TYPE The command queries the type of sensor The type is automatically detected The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS TYPE queries the type of sensor Response NRP Z21 the R amp S NRP Z21 sensor is used Device specific SENSe POWer ZERO The command activates the autozero function Zeroing is required in regular interval at least once a day and if the temperature has varied more than about 5 C if the sensor has been replaced or if measurements of signals with very low power are to be performed The sensor must be disconnected from all power sources before starting the autozero function The command is an event and therefore has no RST value Example SENS ZERO activates autozero function Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 29 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SENSe UNIT POWer DBM DBUV WATT The command selects the unit used for result query with command READ The power sensor provides the measured value in Watt In which unit the measured value is returned is selected here and might be either Watt dBm or dBuV Example SENS UNIT DBM selects unit dBm for the measured value returned by command READ READ Response 7 34 7 34 dBm are measured by the senso
166. and sends with queries the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the most significant byte last SWAP ped the R amp S Signal Generator expects with setting commands and sends with queries the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the least significant byte last Example FORM BORD SWAP the data is transferred with the most significant bit first SCPI NORMal Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description FORMat SREGister ASCii BINary HEXadecimal OCTal The command determines the numerical format which is returned when the status registers are queried Parameters ASCii the register content is returned as a decimal number BlNary the register content is returned as a binary number B is placed in front of the number HEXadecimal the register content is returned as a hexadecimal number H is placed in front of the number OCTal the register content is returned as an octal number Q is placed in front of the number Example FORM SREG HEX the register content is returned as a hexadecimal number MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory subsystem Mass Memory contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files The files are stored on the internal flash memory of the instrument or on external USB memory devices The v
167. and used bus by assembly serial bus or PCI bus Remote control command see chapter Remote control Commands for parameter name for modules DIAG BGIN RFBO Response 1406 7007 00 02 00 123456 MOD FPGA 20 20 00 1411 4060 32 4 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Gui Update Setup System In the Start Stop Gui Update menu the update of the displayed parameters can be switched off in order to increase speed for certain settings Note It is especially recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance with short dwell times and for fast settling times The indicated values are not updated and may therefore differ from the internally used values Please be aware If Gui Update is OFF the values of displayed parameters could differ from their internal used values This mode is mainly provided to support unjittered signal output f e in fast sweep or list mode Changes in remote state changes the value of Gui Update is to ON Remote control command SYST DISP UPD OFF Software Options Setup System The Software Options menu shows the firmware version of the instrument software as well as all installed hardware and software options Note Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a key code The activation code is supplied with the software option How to install options is described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual on CD ROM s
168. ands SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE CW 1411 4060 32 4 74 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode Mode RF Level Selects the Level Sweep instrument operating mode and the Sweep Sweep mode Auto Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle continues from the current sweep setting The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR AUTO SOUR POW MODE SWE Single Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start level The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR SING SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW EXEC Step Sets a step by step sweep cycle If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Level Each sweep step is triggered by a variation of the value in the Current Level entry window The step width is set below at entry field Step If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Level If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the curr
169. ar directory can be used to save user defined data any subdirectory structure can be created on Ivar Some default subdirectories are predefined and must not be changed The default directory is determined using the command MMEMor y CDIR Note The opt directory is a protected and therefore unaccessable system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss To enable files in different file systems to be used the following file naming conventions should be observed The file name can be of any length and no distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase letters The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitted at the beginning of the file name Where possible special characters should not be used Use of the slashes and should be avoided since they are used in file paths A number of names are reserved by the operating system e g CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COM4 LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN In the R amp S Signal Generator all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic extension The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot see the following table containing a list of the file types 1411 4060 32 6 13 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A
170. arallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the content of the ENABle registers are retained or reset at power on Parameters 0 The content of the status registers is retained at power on If the status registers ESE and SRE are configured accordingly this may cause a service request to be triggered at power on The content of the status registers is reset at power on The query PSC retrieves the contents of the Power on Status Clear flag The answer is either O or 1 RCL number RECALL calls up the instrument status which was stored under the specified number using the SAV command e g SAV 4 It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory LOAD number file name extension command 1411 4060 32 6 5 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A RST RESET resets the instrument to a defined default state The command has the same effect as pressing the PRESET key The default setting is given in the description of the commands Functions that concern mainly the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup or are password related are not changed Reference frequency settings Power on settings Network settings EC IEEE bus address Password and settings protected by passwords Start Stop Gui Update Display settings IDN Identification Note Resetting the instr
171. arating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data Binary B10110 Octal 07612 Hexa HF3A7 Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1411 4060 32 5 17 E 1 RES SMC100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Instrument Model and Command Processing The block diagram in the figure below shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the instrument The individual components work independently and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of so called messages Input unit with input buffer Y Command recognition Y Data set IEC IEEE bus Ethernet Status reporting system vy Instrument hardware Y IEC IEEE bus 4 Output unit with Ethernet output buffer Instrument model in the case of remote control via IEC IEEE bus or TCP IP network Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message t
172. ash memory it does not contain a disk drive The flash memory holds the operating system the firmware and the stored data Data transfer is possible via a memory stick connected to a USB interface The memory stick and the flash memory are accessed via the File Manager Screen saver A screen saver can be activated in the R amp S SMC When active the display is shut off when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboard are made for a period of time The screen saver prolongs the life time of the display The screen saver can be switched off and on and the time period can be set in the Environment section of the Setup menu Connecting an External Keyboard and Mouse A commercial external keyboard and mouse with USB interface can be connected to the R amp S SMC A keyboard simplifies the entry of list items comments file names etc A mouse simplifies the control of the block diagram and of associated menus The keyboard and the mouse are connected to the USB interface type A on the rear panel of the instrument The keyboard and mouse are recognized automatically when they are connected The US keyboard assignment is the default setting The keyboard assignment and special settings such as the refresh rate can be changed in the Environment section of the Setup menu 1411 4077 62 1 17 E 1 Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN R amp S SMC100A Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN The R amp S
173. ast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status Therefore control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings Drivers for the generator e g IVI COM and LabVIEW drivers are available in the download area of the R amp S product website http www rohde schwarz com product SMC 100A 1411 4060 32 5 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Getting Started Getting Started The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions As a prerequisite the IEC IEEE bus address which is factory set to 28 must not have been changed 1 Connect instrument and controller using IEC IEEE bus cable and switch them on 2 Write and start the following program on the controller CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Inform controller about instrument address CALL IBWRT generator RST CLS Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator FREQ 50MHz Set frequency to 50 MHz CALL IBWRT generator POW 7 3dBm Set output level 7 3m dBm CALL IBWRT generator OUTP STAT ON Switch on RF output CALL IBWRT generators AM SOUR INT Set AM modulation source LFGEN CALL IBWRT generator LFO FREQ 15kHz Set modulation frequency to 15 kHz CALL IBWRT generators
174. be transmitted via the network and network resources e g a network folders can be used The instrument can also be remote controlled and manually operated in the network It is connected by means of a commercial RJ45 cable The network card functions with 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Connection of the Vector Signal Generator is described in Chapter 1 section Connection to the Network remote control via Ethernet in chapter 5 section Remote control via Ethernet The architecture of a LAN remote control connection is described in detail in the following Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Application SCPI SCPI 3 Presentation XDR VXI 11 RFC 1014 1 2 Session ONC RPC RFC 1057 Transport TCP UDP RFC 793 Network IP RFC 791 Data Link Ethernet 802 3 8802 3 8802 3 Physical 802 3 10BASE T Figure 8 2 Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR legal RPC messages are known as VXI
175. be used Select Operation Recall sl recent data sets Exclude Frequency Exclude Level Recall Recall File Recall Imm 1 Imm 2 Manager Recent data sets File Displays the files last used The entire path is shown If the desired file is in the list it can be selected in this window Remote control command n a Directory File Enter the directory in which the file with the instrument setting to be loaded is located The Selected file window lists all the files in this directory Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user File List File Selects the file with the desired instrument configuration Remote control command MMEM CAT Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is File loaded Remote control command SOUR FREO RCL EXCL Exclude Level File The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote control command SOUR POW RCL EXCL 1411 4060 32 4 27 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Recall File Recall Immediate x 1411 4060 32 Loads the selected configuration If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument sett
176. bject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling Response AC 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example SOURce FREQuency MAX Response 1E3 3 Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example OUTPut STATe Response for ON 1 4 Text character data is returned in a short form Example SOURce AM SOURce Response for EXTernal EXT 1411 4060 32 5 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numerical values Numerical values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the values must be in the value range 9 9E37 to 9 9E37 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed Units In the case of physical quantities the unit ca
177. buffer ESE 0 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the specified value The ESE query command returns the content of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the content of the event status register in decimal form 0 255 and then sets the register to zero 1411 4060 32 6 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification The instrument type serial number and firmware version are returned Example Rohde amp Schwarz SMC100A 1411 4002k02 100070 2 02 136 Release IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the content of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all previous commands have been processed This bit can be used to trigger a service request OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns a 1 when all previous commands have been processed It is important to ensure that the timeout set at the IEC IEEE bus is long enough OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options configured in the instrument and returns a list of the installed options The options are separated by commas PRE 0 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the specified value The PRE query command returns the content of the p
178. case of dependencies between commands they are also indicated 1411 4060 32 6 1 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A Upper lower case notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key Special characters Description of parameters lt Boolean gt 1411 4060 32 words of a command in the description see Chapter 5 The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the frequency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SOURce FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SOURce COUPling AC DC If parameter AC is selected only the AC content is fed through in the case of DC the DC as well as the AC content Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing
179. cconcnononccncconnnnnnnconncnnnn nana nnr cnn nn nr n nn nn nennen nnn nnne 6 28 M MMEMory GATalog ii oi eR il b te bte aiii es 6 18 MMEMory CATalog EENGIth iii ia a ER Ta 6 18 MEMON GDIISeCtOTV a id n ei ua RR a RC REPRE RS 6 19 MME 6 19 MMEMON DATA isos AAA A A AS AAA AA aa 6 20 MMEMoOry BGATalog d fn e a uH HE PREMIER PE eR PERLES 6 20 MME Mon DCA Taloo ENG 6 20 MMEM ory DE Lete ui A I HAM 6 21 MMEMOnN EOAD STATO iiti eee A ee C HH RR Gd 6 21 MMEM NOIRE 00 e liani aie 6 21 MMEMON ez 6 22 MMEMOtIy MSIS 233 TM tte TN DU 6 22 MMEM RDIR GCION 1 iiic eat ded ttd e ood ehe edd doe tdg eu eate dedu rna ea Panda 6 22 MMEMOFy STORG STATO 33 aiii 6 22 1411 4060 32 10 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Commands O OUTPULES TA Te A A A aaa 6 26 OUTPUESTATOERON cit ee ain mates ened 6 27 OUTPutsH12 PROTection CLE EE 6 26 OUTPut AFIXed RANG L Oder 6 25 OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer ocina arier assi tas sinensis ansia ntes aS senten 6 25 OUTPUEAMOBO ees anb aute d unus 6 23 OUTPUEBEANIGEIST STATO iiid er Rte oh on a edd edel e a e e Ro eg beasts 6 26 TER ET 6 25 QUTPut PROTection TRIP DOO 2 a iD e ide eese cea ne e eed a de eR Eo EE da ng 6 26 R e TIR EE 6 28 S SENSe POWer CORRection SPDevice STATe sss enne 6 28 SENSe POWer DISPlay PERManent GTATe sse nennen nennen nena 6 29 SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth USER esses ss
180. ceived Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys 1411 4060 32 8 7 E 1 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMC100A USB Connection USB and USB IN The instrument is equipped as standard with three USB universal serial bus interfaces which are located at the rear of the instrument USB One of them is a type A interfaces host USB which establishes a connection to the controller It can be used for connecting peripherals such as mouse and keyboard or a memory stick for data transmission USB IN The second USB interface is a type B interface device USB hence the instrument is assigned as device not as host It can be used for remote control see chapter Remote Control Basics 1411 4060 32 8 8 E 1 R
181. cessed until all previous commands have been executed and all signals are in their transient condition 1411 4060 32 6 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description CALibration Subsystem The CALibration system contains the commands for adjustment Adjustment is triggered by the query commands The response 0 indicates error free adjustment and the response 1 means that an error occurred during adjustment Command Parameters Default unit CALibration ALL MEASure Query only CALibration FMOFfset MEASure Query ony CALibration LEVel EXT DATA FACTory CUSTom CALibration FRE Quency MEASure CALibration LEVel MEASure PY Query ony ert MN every ony CALibration ALL MEASure The command starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL ALL starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument Response 0 adjustment has been performed successfully Compliant CALibration FREQuency MEASure The command starts all adjustments which affect the frequency The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL FREQ starts the adjustments for maximum frequency accuracy Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 7 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A CALibra
182. ch as solvents e g diluent for lacquers thinners acetone alcohol etc or acids bases or other substances Use a soft non linting cloth to suitably clean the outside of the instrument The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective covers at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage 1411 4060 32 8 1 E 1 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMC100A Hardware Interfaces The following section describes the remote control interfaces of the signal generator All other interfaces are described in Chapter 1 sections Legend for Front Panel View and Legend for Rear Panel View For specifications refer to the data sheet IEC IEEE Bus Interface The instrument can be equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connector option R amp S SMC K4 GPIB IEEE488 Interface The IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel An external controller for remote control of the instrument can be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable Interface Characteristics e 8 bit parallel data transfer e bi directional data transfer e three line han
183. ch on RF frequency sweep by selecting State On Now the Execute Single Sweep button to trigger the single sweep appears The RF is not yet active which means that no RF signal is output 1411 4077 62 2 10 RF Frequency Sweep Mode Single Execute Single Sweep Reset Sweep Reset Sweep Start Freq a wn F 100 000 000 000 MHz an oe can nnn nnn nnn Battie D E 1 R amp S SMC100A Step 3 Activate RF signal Example of Setup SS Activate the RF signal output by pressing the RF ON OFF key To indicate the active state the RF block is displayed in blue An RF signal with the default frequency and level settings is output i e 1 GHz and 30 dBm The single sweep still must be triggered in the sweep menu Step 4 Trigger single RF frequency sweep Select the Execute Single Sweep button in the RF frequency sweep menu by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob RF Frequency Sweep State Mode Single Execute Single Sweep EEN Reset Sweep Start Freq 100 000 000 000 MHz Enn nnn nnn nnn Ratt a F A linear single sweep from 100 MHz to 500 MHz in 1 MHz steps is output with a dwell time of 10 ms per step 1411 4077 62 2 11 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Contents Manual Operation Contents Chapter 3 Manual Operation 3 Manual OPTOMA aa DAR 3 1 Introduction Manual Operation 3 1 Operating Concept 3
184. cient air supply in the rack 1411 4077 62 1 11 E 1 Putting into Operation R amp S SMC100A Safety Instructions General Precautions NOTICE Instrument damage caused by disregarding the following precautions Any non compliance with the following precautions may cause damage to the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation check the following The covers of the housing are in place and screwed on Vents are not obstructed Make sure that the air can escape freely through the vents at the sides The minimum distance to the wall should therefore be at least 10 cm The signal levels at the inputs do not exceed permissible limits The outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or incorrectly connected This particularly applies to the maximum permissible back feed at the outputs which is specified in the data sheet The ambient temperature must not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Please also observe the instructions in the following sections and the general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual Protection against Electrostatics To avoid damaging the electronic components of the EUT Equipment Under Test due to electrostatic discharge produced by contact the use of appropriate protective measures is recommended Setting up the Instrument CAUTION Risk of injury and instrument damage 1411 4077 62 Safe operation with support feet Stacked instruments may slip off Secu
185. cor csv selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the user correction list ucor imp is imported into ASCII file ucor csv SEMicolon Device specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal DOT COMMa The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor csv selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the user correction list ucor imp is imported into ASCII file ucor csv Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 38 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce CORRection DEXChange EXECute The command starts the export or import of the selected file When import is sel
186. ction Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Opens the selection list Press rotary knob or Press Enter key Click KM button ENTER key i Selects an entry Select entry using the rotary Select entry using the Double click the desired knob or the up down arrow up down arrow keys and entry keys and confirm with the confirm with the Enter key rotary knob or the ENTER key Scrolls Shift the displayed list Shift the displayed list Press Ml or BB button in section using the rotary knob section using the up down the scroll bar until the or the up down arrow keys arrow keys desired entry is displayed Terminating Entries Setting Parameters Variations by means of the rotary knob are immediately set e g RF frequency variation All other parameter settings have to be confirmed by a pressing the rotary knob or one of the unit keys see also section Selecting a Unit page 3 15 Some settings require additional confirmation with the Accept button This is the case when it is useful to first enter a few values and to confirm them together e g when network settings are made Settings not yet confirmed by Accept are displayed in the menu on a yellow background This indicates that the currently displayed values do not represent the desired signal All settings of instrument functions that can be switched on and off are calculated and effective only after this function has been switched on This applies to most settings on the R amp S SMC An exceptio
187. ction TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table the user correction list is exported to or imported from Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB Calls the File Manager for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a user correction list source or the ASCII file the user correction list is exported destination in Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEL d user ucor listl txt Calls the File Manager for selecting the user correction list to be exported source into an ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported destination in Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC SEL d user ucor listl txt Starts the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC EXEC 4 64 E 1 R amp S SMC100A User Correction Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data The level correct
188. ctivate user correction tables see also chapter 4 Each list is stored as a file The name of the user correction file can be freely selected The file extension uco is assigned automatically and cannot be changed The files can be stored in a freely selectable directory and opened from there The default directory is set using command MMEMory CDIRectory In the case of files which are stored in the default directory only the file name has to be specified in commands Otherwise the complete absolute path has to be specified with every command The extension can be omitted in any case The amplitude can also be linearized automatically by means of a R amp S NRP power sensor connected to the generator output signal With the aid of the SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWER SONCe command a list with correction values for external test assemblies can be automatically determined e g for compensating the frequency response of cables The correction values can be acquired any time irrespective of the modulation settings of the generator Note In the following command examples the files are stored in the default directory The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted Pee eee E SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog E MAN Queryonty only SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 300 kHz RFmax 300 kHz RF max SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts O Ea Queryonty only SOURce CORRection CSET
189. ctive functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The password for the first level is 123456 This protection level can be used to lock out internal adjustments The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST PROT1 ON activates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are only possible after deactivating the lock out SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 deactivates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are enabled again SCPI Compliant SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST SERR queries all errors existing in the error queue Response 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range the two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was last queried SCPI Device specific SYSTem STARtup COMPlete The command queries if the startup of the instrument is completed This command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example SYST STAR COMP Response 1 the startup of the instrument is completed 1411 4060 32 6 97 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem TIME 0 23 0 59 0 59
190. cture of the command i e on the position in the command header they are inserted in Example SOURce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level It defines the polarity between modulator and modulation signal SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level It defines the polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked by square brackets in this manual The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by omitting optional key words Example SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate Offset 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 dB The following command has the same effect POWer Offset 1 The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 STAT QUES ENAB 1 Note Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case letters Parameters
191. cy Old frequency STEP LOG x Old frequency STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency The frequency is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is given in percent whereby the suffix PCT must always be used The command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained 1411 4060 32 6 56 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description Example FO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 1 kHz FO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 100 kHz FO SWE SPAC LOG sets logarithmic sweep spacing FO SWE STEP LOG 10PCT sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 of the previous frequency in each instance Correlation 0 01 PCT The value of LFO SWE POIN is adjusted Device specific automatically SOURce LFOutput VOLTage 0V 4V The command sets the output voltage of the LF output Example LFO VOLT 3 V sets the voltage of the LF output to 3 V SCPI Device specific SOURce MODulation Subsystem This subsystem contains the command for switching on off all modulations Command Parameters L C MERE MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF E et SOURc
192. cy and level fields at the left of the info line or in the info line itself Status information displayed between the frequency and level fields RF OFF The RF output is switched off MOD OFF All modulations are switched off FREQ OFFSET A frequency offset is set The frequency entered and displayed in the frequency field takes any set frequency offset into consideration e g an offset set for a downstream instrument This means that with a frequency offset the frequency displayed in the header does not correspond to the frequency at the RF output but rather to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered in the frequency field The signal generator changes the RF output frequency according to the entered offset However the frequency entered and displayed in the Frequency Phase menu of the RF Ana Mod function block always corresponds to the RF output frequency Any frequency offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Freq in header RF output frequency Freq in menu Freq offset Offset in menu 1411 4060 32 9 1 E 1 Status Information R amp S SMC100A LEVEL OFFSET EXT REF A level offset is set The level entered and displayed in the Level field takes the offset of any downstream attenuators amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation This means that with a level offset the level
193. d Remote control command SOUR POW LIM AMPL 30 dBm Sets the level offset relative to the RF level The level offset of a downstream instrument e g an attenuator or amplifier is entered The entry does not change the RF level at the RF output It only changes the RF level displayed in the display header the RF level in the header corresponds to the level at the output of the downstream instrument Remote control command SOUR POW LEV IMM OFFS 0 The attenuator mode is set in the Attenuator Settings section Attenuator Mode RF Level 1411 4060 32 Sets the attenuator mode at the RF output Auto Standard mode The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range Remote control command OUTP AMOD AUTO Fixed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed in its current position and the resulting variation range is defined The range is displayed under Attenuator Fixed Range If automatic level control is activated ALC State On the level settings are made without interruption If the normal variation range is overranged or underranged level errors increase considerably and the warning Level under overrange appears in the info line The spectral purity of the output signal decreases with high attenuation Remote control command OUTP AMOD FIX 4 54 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Level At
194. d activates the DNS setting Commands SYST COMM NETW DNS The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW DNS SET activates all changes of the DNS settings SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 90 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork GET The command retrieves the current network settings They can be queried with the corresponding commands The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW GET retrieves the current network settings SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 0 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF The command enters the IP address The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Example SYST COMM NETW IPAD 7 8 9 10 enters the IP address of the R amp S SMC SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 0 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF The command enters the IP address of the default gateway The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Example SYST COMM NETW GAT 1 2 3 4 enters the IP address of the default gateway SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings SCPI Device specific
195. der manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate SINGIe Single mode EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command SWEep POW MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGIe One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands 18WE POW EXEC Or TRG or TRIG PSW IMM The mode has to be set to AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTO The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current level a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start level and so on Example TRIG PSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector SINGle Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 102 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description TRIGger SWEep IMMediate The command starts the sweeps which
196. disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered e g the end of an adjustment Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Operation register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus OPERation register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Example STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 84 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description STATus PRESet The command resets the status registers All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFH 32767 i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to O i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example STAT PRES resets the status registers SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrume
197. dition of infinite and the representation of missing values 1411 4060 32 5 15 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Boolean Parameters Text Strings Block data 1411 4060 32 Boolean parameters represent two states The on state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The off state logically untrue is represented by off or the numerical value 0 On or off is returned by a query Example Setting command SOURCe AM STATe ON Query SOURCe AM STATe Answer 1 Text parameters observe the syntax rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command SOURce SWEep POWer MODE MANual Query SOURCe SWEep POWer MODE Answer MAN Strings must always be entered within quotation marks or Example CORR CSET UCOR1 Or CORR CSET UCOR1 Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example MMEMory DATA test file wv 45168xxxxxxxx Test file wv denotes the name of the file to which the data are written The comma is followed by the binary data block The hash symbol introduces the data block The next number
198. dshake e high data transfer rate e upto 15 instruments can be connected e maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m single connection 2m e wired OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EOI D2 DO GND SRQ_ NDAC DAV A m ey ae GND 24 GND 22 GND 20 GND 18 GND 23 GND 21 GND 19 REN D6 D4 Figure 8 1 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE Bus interface 1411 4060 32 8 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Hardware Interfaces Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DO to D7 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DO is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN Attention active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable active LOW permits switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data active LOW signals that one of the connec
199. dware settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution Database and Instrument Hardware The expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation etc The controller is not included The term database denotes a database that manages all the parameters and associated settings required for setting the instrument hardware Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition As this is only ever effected at the end of a command line the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the detection is made that execution is not possible an execution error is signaled to the status reporting system All alterations of the data set are canceled the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting however impermissible instrument states can be set for a short period of time within one command line without this leading to an error message At
200. e amplitude modulation can be activated in this way The menus of the highlighted function blocks can be called by clicking the rotary knob or by pressing the ENTER key Modulation config ENSURE Mod E On Phase Mod Pulse Mod The signal flow between the function blocks and the employed inputs and outputs are also shown IR MOD The menu tree can be opened and closed with the SETUP key The menu tree is organized in the same way as the directories under Windows The function blocks correspond to the first directory level the menus to subdirectories Mod Gen LF Freq Sweep LF Output i Pulse Gen g Modulation Operation corresponds to the Windows concept To offer the user a familiar environment operation is very similar to operation of Windows user interfaces All menus and tables are made up of known elements e g selection lists FM Deviation 1 000 00 1H 4 ras oc mr D Ext check boxes Adjustment Active SI or entry fields AM Depth IK Z A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active In the highlighted element entries can be made 1411 4077 62 3 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Operating Concept Most of the settings can be easily made with the rotary knob Operation is possible via front panel keys an external keyboard and the mouse Most of the settings can be made with the rotary knob e Turning the rotary knob shifts the entry focu
201. e 27 the maximum level is 27 dBm Device specific OUTPut IMPedance The command queries the impedance of the RF output This permits converting the output level between units V and W The impedances cannot be changed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP IMP queries the impedance of the RF output Response 50 the impedance is 50 ohms Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 21 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A OUTPut Blank RF Output OUTPut BLANk LIST STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates RF output blanking The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP BLAN LIST STAT ON activates the RF output blanking Device specific OUTPut Protection ClearOUTPut lt 1 2 gt PROTection CLEar The command resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped The state of the output is again determined by OUTPut STATe The output is protected by a protective circuit which deactivates the output in the case of an externally applied overvoltage This does not change the value of OUTPut STATe Example OUTP PROT CLE resets the protective circuit for the RF output Compliant OUTPut ProtectionOUTPut PROTection TRIPped The command queries the state of the protective circuit The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example OUTP PROT TRIP queries the state of the protective circuit for RF output A Response
202. e MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF The command switches the modulations on and off A subsequent command SOUR MOD ALL STAT ON restores the status that was active before the last switch off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the header next to the Level field Example MOD STAT OFF switches off all active modulations Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 57 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce PHASe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal relative to a reference signal of the same frequency The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted SOURce PHASe 359 9 deg 359 9 deg The command specifies the phase variation relative to the current phase The variation can be specified in RADians Example PHAS 2DEG changes the phase by 2 degrees relative to the current phase PHAS REF adopts the set phase as the current phase Compliant SOURce PHASe REFerence The command adopts the phase set with SOURce PHASe ADJust as the current phase The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example PHAS 0 1RAD changes the phase by 0 1 rad relative to the current phase PHAS REF adopts the set phase as the current phase Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 58 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce PM Subsystem The PM subsystem contains the commands for checking
203. e OVERLOAD status message Reset the overload protection by pressing the RF ON OFF key The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset Remote control commands OUTP PROT TRIP OUTP PROT CLE OUTP STAT ON 1411 4060 32 4 55 E 4 RF EMF R amp S SMC100A RF EMF The power on behavior of the R amp S SMC Signal Generator and the level display in the display header are set in the RF EMF menu EMF Menu The EMF menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF RF ON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep Ki The power on behavior of the R amp S SMC Signal Generator and the level display in the display header are set in the Power On EMF Settings section Power On EMF Settings Power On State Previous Setting y Display Level as Voltage of EMF T Power On State RF Selects the state which the RF output is to assume after the Output instrument is switched on RF OFF The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Remote control command OUTP PON OFF Previous When the instrument is switched on the output Setting assumes the same state as it had when the instrument was switched off Remote control command OUTP PON ON Display Level as Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF
204. e appears prompting the user to confirm deletion of the file Remote control command MMEM DEL var test savercl Creates a new directory The name of the new directory can be entered in the New Directory window The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level Remote control command MMEM MDIR var user test Note When the subdirectory is entered it is possible to enter an absolute path name e g var user meas or the path relative to the current directory e g MEAS 4 38 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Signal RF RF Signal RF Overview of RF Signal Settings for the RF output signal are made under RF Signal These settings can be accessed in the block diagram by way of the RF function block or by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the SETUP key Iv The function block is available for the basic unit R amp S SMC frequency option R amp S SMC B10x without additional equipment options The RF ON OFF key can be used to activate and deactivate the output signal irrespective of the current entry focus The previous state is restored when the signals are reactivated Remote control command OUTP STAT OFF OUTP STAT ON The activated and deactivated state is indicated in the block diagram by means of the different block color and the status of the On checkbox The disconnected connection to the output is additionall
205. e 0 4095 The command specifies the frequency correction value adjustment value Example ROSC ADJ VAL 1400 sets the adjustment value to 1400 SCPI Device specific SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects between internal and external reference frequency Parameters INTernal The internal reference oscillator is used The reference signal is provided at the REF OUT connector EXTernal An external reference signal is used It must have a frequency of 10 MHz and must be input at the REF IN connector at the rear of the instrument Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external source SCPI Device specific SOURce SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for checking the RF sweeps i e the sweeps of the RF generators Sweeps are always triggered except for the MANual sweep mode The frequency sweep is activated by the command SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep and the level sweep by the command SOURce POWer MODE SWEep All sweeps including the LF sweep can be set independently of each other The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted A sweep is set in several steps which are shown below taking a frequency sweep as an example 1 Set the sweep range SOURce FREQuency CENTer 200 MHz SOURce FREQuency SPAN 300 MHz 2 Select linear or logarithmic spacing SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN 3 Set t
206. e RF start level in Sweep mode As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the of fset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer Offset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level Offset Maximum level Offset Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example POW STAR 20 dBm sets the start level for the level sweep to 15 dBm Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 65 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 dB 100dB The command sets the step width for the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as the level values and variation mode SOUR POW STEP MODE USER is selected The command is linked to setting Variation Step for manual control i e the command also sets the step width of the rotary knob for Variation Active on Example SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 2 Or POW STEP 2 sets the step width for entering the RF level to 2 dB Device specific SOURce POWer STEP MODE USER DECimal This command activates USER or deactivates DECima1 the user defined step width used when varying the level value with the level values UP DOWN The command is linked to setting
207. e analog modulations AM FM and PhiM can be selected independently from each other A pulse generator provides single and double pulse modulation with selectable pulse widths and periods The internal pulse generator signal is provided at the PULSE VIDEO output connector on the rear panel of the instrument The R amp S SMC Signal Generator offers three different sweep types RF frequency sweep level sweep and LF frequency sweep to be activated alternatively Each type has 6 modes which differ with respect to the sweep cycle mode continuous individual and step by step and triggering mode automatic internal and external In the Mod Gen block the LF sweep is configured Frequency and level sweep settings are accessed via the RF block The status line in the block displays whether the LF generator the pulse generator and or a sweep are active 1411 4077 62 2 2 E 1 RES SMC100A Description of Individual Diagram Blocks Modulation block MOD PULSE GI Gi jv The internal and external analog modulations are configured and activated in the Modulation block The MOD ON OFF key switches the active modulation s on off The internal modulation sources are configured in the Mod Gen block External amplitude frequency or phase modulation signals can be fed in at the input connector MOD EXT on the front of the instrument An external pulse signal is fed in via the BNC connector PULSE EXT on the rear of the instrument AC o
208. e columns and for decimal floating point numerals can be set In addition internally created User Correction data can be exported into ASCII files using the export function The amplitude can also be linearized automatically by means of a R amp S NRP power sensor connected to the generator output signal With the aid of the Fill with Sensor function a table with correction values for external test assemblies can be automatically determined e g for compensating the frequency response of cables The User Correction list with the correction values acquired by the sensor is generated in the Edit User Correction List menu The correction values can be acquired any time irrespective of the modulation settings of the generator If user correction is activated the UCOR display User Correction is shown in the header together with the Level display The RF output level is the sum of both values Level UCOR Output level If activated user correction is effective in all operating modes User Correction Menu The User Correction menu is opened either in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF RF ON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep 1411 4060 32 4 59 E 4 User Correction R amp S SMC100A The combined menu ALC UCOR menu provides access to function User Correction in the User Correction Settings
209. e enne nennen rennen nnne nennt 6 29 SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth AUTO isset a nenas sitne etant nennen nn 6 29 SENSe POWer FIL Ter NSRatio sss eene ensi nennen senten nnne nennen annees 6 31 SENSe POWer FILTer SONCe irissen iiti enii eai ieat ramas 6 31 SENSeELPOWOerEFIL TORY PE i ia iaa 6 32 SENSe POWer FRE QUENCY cti taa 6 32 SEN Set OH Mere e Her ER ee p ede eie e RIA eee ee 6 33 SENSe POWer OFFSet STATe sss sissssesss ensi sethn seine thes sata sanete rese nass na nns nnne 6 33 SENSE POWE NM bereede Eege EEN 6 33 SENSe POWerT e 6 33 SENSe POWer STATus DEVice r a aa sisi e einen ennt sesta sinet nre ANR nnne 6 34 SENSe POWer SVERSION at ne Ee d HER HE P p uh 6 34 SENSeEPOWer TYPE cia bb REV e RED HU UR ERO 6 34 SENSe POWerEZERO sian do ea Ae el Reha A a 6 34 SENSe UNIT POWer nee ia Ae e tdi d e 6 35 1411 4060 32 10 3 E 1 Alphabetical List of Commands R amp S SMC100A S SOURCE POWer ALCIOMODE RR 6 73 ISQURce JAMEDEPTR iiit lee o UU TH EP an 6 36 SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling esses eene nnne nennen enne sentent 6 36 Kee to Io E RO e E de IE o ERREUR 6 37 Kee e 6 37 ISOURGG TAM S TATO i eto tet ebd Rmi lumus 6 37 SOQURce CORRection STA RE ee tts Te rtt eo rea dena ded a T e M ES teeta 6 48 SOURce CORRection CSET SELect essei nennen 6 47 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog sssssssssss sisse nnne nhan ennt ernann
210. e files with extension txt Response list1 list2 the ASCII files ucor1 txt and ucor2 txt are available Device specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFlLe SELect ascii file name The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor imp Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 37 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFlLe SEParator COLumn TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe The command selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs gen ucor import u
211. e modulation in RAD The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Example PM 5E3 sets the PM modulation deviation for external phase modulation of 5 RAD See data sheet Compliant SOURce PM SENSitivity The command queries the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in RAD V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR PM SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting SOUR PM DEViation This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example PM DEV 1 sets a modulation deviation of 1RAD PM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the EXT MOD input Response 1 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 1RAD V Compliant SOURce PM SOURce EXT INT The command selects the modulation source for phase modulation INT is the internal modulation source which is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external analog signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Example PM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source INTernal Compliant SOURce PM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates phase modulation Activation of phase modulation deactivates frequency modulation Example PM STAT ON activates PM
212. e new list Mark the User Correction Data button click the rotary Mark the User Correction Data button and press the knob or press the ENTER ENTER key key Mark Create New List click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Mark Create New List and press the Enter key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Double click the User Correction Data button Double click Create New List Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Help System The R8S SMC is equipped with a context sensitive help function A help page is available for each parameter and can be called any time during instrument operation The context sensitive page which is opened with the HELP context sensitive page to any page of the help system Note key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this Compiled online help systems are also available for all functions of the R amp S SMC on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument This help program can be called on any controller with Internet Explorer version V 4 0 and higher 1411 4077 62 3 20 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Back Remote control command R ST Previous Next Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defin
213. e of front panel control or operation from the keyboard previous values can be restored as long as the new value is not confirmed i e the entry is not completed This can be done with the ESC key Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Restores previous values Press the ESC key before the entries are confirmed Press the Esc key before the entries are confirmed 1411 4077 62 3 17 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Menu Operation Menu Operation Menus are operated with the aid of the Winbar buttons and with the CLOSE and DIAGR keys on the front panel e The DIAGR key toggles between block diagram magnified frequency and level indication and the display of the active menu e The CLOSE key closes an active menu Note The ESC key also closes the active menu if the cursor is at the highest menu level Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Displays the block diagram Press the DIAGR key Press CTRL D Click function block in the foreground Displays a menu in the Press the associated button Press Click the respective button in foreground CTRL F1 to F8 the Winbar Closes an active menu Press the CLOSE key Press CTRL G Click the X button in the menu bar Hides all menus Click the DIAGR key Press CTRL D 1411
214. e s parameters correction data of the connected power sensor For sensor with attenuator this checkbox is automatically checked Please see the manual of the connected R amp S NRP power sensor for a description on how to use the s parameters table Remote control command SENS POW CORR SPD STAT ON 4 51 E 4 RF Level R amp S SMC100A RF Level Note The message Level overrange underrange appears in the info line if the set level Level is in the overrange or underrange see data sheet The correct level setting cannot be guaranteed for the entire frequency range if the set level is in the overrange underrange The easiest way to set the RF level is to enter it directly in the header of the display Level am dem The entry is activated by pressing the LEVEL key Changes to the level have an immediate effect without confirmation with the Enter key on the output signal Remote control command SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 30 dBm Note The GPIB command sets the level of the Level display i e an entered level offset is taken into consideration in the level value see below dBm dBuV mV and pV can be used as the level units The 4 unit keys are labeled with these units The level entered and displayed in the Level field takes the offset of any downstream attenuators amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation This means that with a level offset the level displayed in the header does not corre
215. e specified directory are selected The command is an event and therefore has no RST value Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucorl selects the table ucor1 CORR ON activates level correction Correction is performed using the table ucor1 Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 40 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates level correction Level correction is performed using the table which has been selected with the command CORRection CSET SELect Example SOUR CORR CSET ucorl selects the table ucor1 SOUR CORR ON activates user correction Device specific SOURce CORRection VALue The command requests the current value for user correction This command is a query command and has no RST value Example CORR VAL queries the value currently used for level correction Response 3 the correction value is 3dB Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 41 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce FM Subsystem The FM subsystem contains the commands for checking the frequency modulation The FM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce FM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem e g frequency The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector
216. e sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SHAP SAWT One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back i e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SHAP TRI Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes Step Lin or Step Log is displayed depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step Lin Step Log With the linear sweep the step width is a fixed frequency value which is added to the current frequency The linear step width is entered in Hz Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1 kHz With the logarithmic sweep the step width is a constant fraction of the current frequency This fraction is added to the current frequency The logarithmic step width is entered in Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LOG 1 PCT 4 97 E 4 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMC100A Dwell Time LF Sweep Sets the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ DWEL 10ms Ext Trigger Input Sets the polarity of the active slo
217. e time at which they are pressed during parameter entry Selecting the unit If a unit key is pressed immediately after a numeric value has been entered it terminates the entry and determines the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit e g the k m key determines the unit kHz after frequency entry 3060688 If a level value is entered the unit indicated on the unit key is used e g the k m mV key determines the unit mV for level entry The level entry must be activated e g by pressing the LEVEL key Changing the unit See chapter 3 section Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters Hj If a numeric entry is terminated with the rotary knob and not with a unit key the unit displayed in the unit field of the parameter in the menu is assigned If the unit key is pressed later the unit is changed but not the value The value is recalculated to suit the new unit e g the display changes from 1000 to 1 when the Hz is changed to kHz The new unit is then indicated in the value field of the menu Assignment G n dBuV giga nano dBuV for RF levels dBu for LF levels Miu uV mega micro uV for levels k m mV kilo milli mV for levels ENTER dB m basic unit dBm for levels dB for level offset and level step width function as ENTER key for unit free values 1411 4077 62 1 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Legend for Front Panel View 4 Keypad for data entry ENTER ENTER See chapter 3 section dB m C
218. e to the desired position Select an item in the table of contents Select Content in the help window using the arrow keys Select Content in the help window using the arrow keys Click Content and activate by clicking the left right and activate with SES Be ee of the item is rotary knob or the ENTER the Enter key Per key Select the desired item Select the desired item using the arrow keys and using the rotary knob or the activate with Enter arrow keys up down and activate by clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key Select an index term Select Index in the help Select Index in the help Click Indext window using the arrow keys window using the arrow keys Click item The help page of the term is displayed and activate by clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key Select the desired item using the rotary knob or the arrow keys up down and activate by clicking the rotary knob or the ENTERI key left right and activate with the Enter key Select the desired item using the arrow keys and activate with Enter 1411 4077 62 3 21 E 1 RES SMC100A File Management File Management The R amp S SMC uses files to save all instrument data i e system and user data The user data includes saved instrument settings and lists for the user correction The files are stored in the internal memory of the instrument or on a USB memeory
219. e value of SWE STEP is adjusted Device specific adapted to automatically instrument properties SOURce SWEep FREQuency SHAPe SAWTooth TRlangle The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence shape Parameters SAWTooth One sweep runs from start to stop frequency Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency i e the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth TRlangle One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back i e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency Example SOUR SWE SHAP TRI selects the sweep cycle with alternating sweep directions 1411 4060 32 6 77 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LlNear LOGarithmic The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Example SWE SPAC LIN selects linear sweep spacing for a frequency sweep SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LiNear 0 STOP STARt The command sets the step width for linear sweeps This command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 If STEP LIN changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained The keywords FREQuency and LINear can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI co
220. ecify UP and DOWN The frequency is then increased or decreased by the value which is set under SOURce FREQuency STEP As with the FREQ value entered in the display the Of fset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if of fset is set to 0 The value range for other Of fset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 kHz Offset RFmax Offset Example FREQ 500kHz sets the frequency of RF output signal A to 500 kHz Resolution Options Correlation FREQ for FREQ MODE SWE linked to Compliant sweep frequency SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines whether the current frequency setting is retained or whether the stored frequency setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded RST does not affect this setting Parameters INCLude The stored frequency is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded The current frequency is retained Example FREQ RCL INCL the stored frequency is set if the Recall command is called 1411 4060 32 6 45 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce FREQuency MANual STAR STOP In Sweep mode SOUR FREQ MODE SWE the command sets the frequency for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR SWE M
221. ected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor imp CORR DEXC EXEC starts the import of the ASCII file data into the user correction file Device specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange MODE IMPort EXPort The command selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported Depending on the selection her the file select command define either the source or the destination for user correction lists and ASCII files Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor imp Device
222. ection RF Phase page 4 42 The frequency and offset are set in the top section of the menu Frequency RF Signal Sets the RF frequency of the RF output connector The frequency entered and displayed here corresponds to the frequency at the RF output i e any offset entry is not taken into consideration Remote control command n a Note There is no GPIB command available for this setting The GPIB command SOUR FREQ sets the frequency of the FREQ display i e the frequency containing offset Frequency Offset RF Sets the frequency offset relative to the RF frequency The frequency Signal offset of a downstream instrument e g a mixer is entered The entry does not change the RF frequency at the RF output It only changes the RF frequency displayed in the display header the RF frequency in the header corresponds to the frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 Hz 1411 4060 32 4 41 E 4 RF Phase R amp S SMC100A If the frequency is set using the rotary knob the step width is defined in the User Variation section Variation Step RF Signal Variation Active RF Phase Sets the user defined step width This step width is used when entering the RF frequency using the rotary knob Frequency variation with this step width must also be activated with Variation Active Remote control command SOUR FR EO ST EP 1 MHz Activates the user defined step width used when varying the fre
223. ection of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation source Amplitude Modulation AM Source Ext Se AM Depth 300 z AM Sensitivity 30 0 per Volt Mod Ext Coupling Ac 1411 4060 32 4 81 E 4 Amplitude Modulation AM R amp S SMC100A State AM AM Source AM AM Depth AM Sensitivity AM Ext Coupling 1411 4060 32 Activates deactivates AM modulation Remote control command SOUR AM STAT ON Selects the source for the AM signal Int Selects the internal modulation source for AM modulation Remote control command SOUR AM SOUR INT Ext Selects the external source The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR AM SOUR EXT Sets the modulation depth in percent Remote control command SOUR AM DEPT 20PCT Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under AM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Remote control command SOUR AM SENS Response 30 Source External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source Remote control command SOUR AM EXT COUP AC 4 82 E 1 RES SMC100A Frequency Modula
224. ectors Example TRIG SWE SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector SINGle Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 103 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument ee GE EE UNIT ANGle DEG RAD The command defines the default unit for angles It is valid for all commands which determine angle values It does not influence the manual control parameter unit and the display Example UNIT ANGL DEG sets default unit DEG for all commands which determine angle values Compliant UNIT POWer V DBM The command defines the default unit for power It is valid for all commands which determine power values It does not influence the manual control parameter unit and the display Example UNIT POW V sets default unit V for all commands which determine power values Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 104 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Contents Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Contents Chapter 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces 8 1 Introduction Maintenance and Intertaces sss 8 1 EU e 8 1 Cleaning the Outside and Storing oooonoccccnnnnccccnnncccnnnonananananana na
225. ed and an execution error is generated At the time when this command is processed the previous setting of the RF frequency 60 MHZ is still valid i e the value for the FM deviation is outside the permissible value range The two other commands are executed This example shows that it is advisable to send interdependent commands in one program message as in this case the sequence in which they are sent is irrelevant For further examples on command sequence see section Command Sequence and Command Synchronization on page 5 21 Before passing on the data to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set see section Status Reporting System page 5 23 The hardware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has settled This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing Queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit on request The exact structure and function are described in section Status Reporting System Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data set management It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer cont
226. ed instrument setup AI parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings pfi Help System The help function is provided with a navigation bar i e other help pages can be called from the context sensitive page via the table of contents the index arrows for scrolling and page internal links Operation of context sensitive help Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Open the help system Press HELP key Press F1 key The help page for the respective parameter is displayed Close the help system Press HELP key again Press F1 key again Activate the link Select link with rotary knob Select link using the arrow Click link The help system branches to the linked page or arrow keys and activate by clicking the rotary knob or ENTER key keys and activate with the Enter key Page Up down Select Previous Next or Back in the help window using the arrow keys and activate by clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key Select Previous Next or Back in the help window using the arrow keys and activate with the Enter key Click Previous Next or Back Scroll Move indicated help window area using the rotary knob and the arrow keys Move indicated help window area using the arrow keys Click the scroll bar and mov
227. ed into the error queue User Request This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key Le when the instrument is switched over to manual control Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument Esa a W 1411 4060 32 5 26 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Application of the Status Reporting System In order to effectively use the status reporting system the information contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed There are several methods which are outlined in the following Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from section Overview of the Status Register an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in the enable registers SRE and ESE Example Use command oPC to generate an SRQ e CALL IBWRT generator ESE 1 set bit O of ESE Operation Complete e CALL IBWRT generator SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ
228. ed under Select Operation the File menu provides options for loading complete instrument settings Here it is possible to select whether the current or stored RF frequency and RF level settings are to be used File Select Operation Save y File recent data sets recent data sets var smc var smc 4 Exclude Frequency Exclude Level y File Name Recent data sets File Displays the files last used The entire path is shown If the desired file is in the list it can be selected in this window Remote control command n a Directory File Enter the directory in which the file with the instrument setting to be loaded is located The Selected file window lists all the files in this directory Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user File List File Selects the file with the desired instrument configuration Remote control command MMEM CAT Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is File loaded Remote control command SOUR FREQ RCL EXCL Exclude Level File The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote control command SOUR POW RCL EXCL 1411 4060 32 4 36 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data Recall File Loads the selected configuration If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called
229. ed value The level offset value is set with command SENSe POWer Offset Example SENS POW OFFS 0 4dB sets a level offset of 0 4 dB SENS POW OFFS STAT ON a level offset of 0 4 dB is added to the measured value SENSe POWer SNUMber The command queries the serial number of the sensor The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS SNUM queries the serial number Device specific SENSe POWer SOURce A USER The command selects the signal source for the measurement The RF signal A or a user defined source can be selected The frequency of the user defined source has to be entered with command SENSe POWer FREQuency Example SENS SOUR A selects the RF signal as measurement source The RF frequency is used as the measurement frequency of the sensor and the corresponding correction factor is used The level setting of the instrument serves as reference level of the measurement Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 28 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SENSe POWer STATus DEVice The command queries if a sensor is connected to the signal generator The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS STAT queries if a sensor is connected Response 1 a sensor is connected Device specific SENSe POWer SVERsion The command queries the software version of the connected R amp S NRP power sensor The comm
230. een Saver Activates deactivates the screen saver of the instrument display If activated the display lamp is shut off when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboard are made for a period of time Wait Time The screen saver prolongs the life time of the display lamp This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is exclusively operated via remote control Remote control command DISP PSAV STAT ON Wait Time Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries are made Remote control command DISP PSAV HOLD 10 Remote Channel Settings Setup Remote The Remote GPIB Ethernet menu provides access to the GPIB and Ethernet settings The Remote GPIB menu is opened using the SETUP key under Remote Remote Channel Settings GPIB Settings GPIB channel address Visa Resource Strings TCPIP TCPIP 10 111 10 240 INSTR USB USB 0xAAD 110 100003 INSTR Local GPIB channel address Sets the IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument Remote control command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 1411 4060 32 4 20 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Visa Resource String Local Remote Channel Settings General Instrument Settings Indicates the visa resource string This string is used for remote control of the instrument A separate string is provided for remote control via the LAN and the USB interface Remote control commands
231. eep instrument operating mode and Sweep mode Auto Single Sets an automatic repeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle continues from the current sweep setting The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR AUTO SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start frequency The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR SING SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ EXEC 4 93 E 4 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMC100A Step Extern Single 1411 4060 32 Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by a variation of the value in the Current Freq entry window If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Freq If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the current LF frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands
232. el setting 4 58 6 23 Unit Power Gensorg 4 52 6 28 Test Equipment Depot 1 800 517 8431 VA A rid MR 1411 4060 32 Index A PEE 3 11 Universal commande 8 4 Unix controller eaaoaaaanannnnannanannnnnnnnnnnnne 1 24 Unknown list type specified 242 9 21 Upper 0 R 6 2 USB Visa Resource String 4 22 Use SParameters Power Sensors 4 56 6 29 User Correction sse 4 64 6 39 User Correction Data 4 65 6 40 V Value User Correction 4 65 var directory A 3 23 6 16 Variation ACUE EE 4 46 Dc 4 46 4 59 6 56 6 79 Video Sync Signal state 4 107 6 80 Visa Resource String 4 22 Ethernet ii nnee 6 112 USB or ia 6 112 VNC connechon eene 1 24 Voltage LF outp t sees 4 107 6 68 Test DOM bus 4 15 W Wait Time Setup 4 21 6 13 Warmimgs nssnenneennannneaeeenne aanne neeeennennnnene 3 7 9 4 White space 5 18 Z Zero Power Sensors 4 53 6 35 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 Phone 781 665 1400 Toll Free 1 800 517 8431 10 19 E 1
233. ency STARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual become effective Resolution Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 46 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 GHz 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of a downconversion instrument e g a mixer If a frequency offset is entered the frequency entered with SOURce FREQuency no longer corresponds to the RF output frequency The following correlation applies SOURce FREQuency RF output frequency SOURce FREQuency Offset Entering an offset does not change the RF output frequency but rather the query value of SOURce FREQuency Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 500kHz sets the frequency offset to 500 kHz Compliant SOURce FREQuency SPAN 0 RF max RFmax depending on model This command specifies the span for the sweep This setting in combination with the center frequency setting SOUR FREQ CENT defines the sweep range This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ STAR and SOUR FREQ STOP i e changing these values causes the SPAN value to change and vice versa SPAN STOP STARt Negative values for SPAN are permitted STARt gt STOP then applies Example FREQ CENT 400 MHz sets the center frequency of the frequency sweep to 400 MHz FREQ SPAN 200 MHz sets a span of 200 MHz This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz to 500 MHz Resolution Correlation SP
234. ensitivity of the MOD EXT input in V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR AM SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation depth setting SOUR AM DEPTh This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example AM DEPT 50 sets a modulation depth of 50 AM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the MOD EXT input Response 50 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50 V Compliant SOURce JAM SOURce EXT INT The command selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation INT is the internal modulation source and is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Example AM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source INTernal Compliant SOURce AM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates amplitude modulation Example AM STAT ON activates AM modulation Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 32 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce CORRection Subsystem The output level is corrected in the CORRection subsystem Correction is performed by user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency In the R amp S Signal Generator this subsystem is used to select transfer and a
235. ent state that was set before the instrument was switched off An exeption is the state of the RF output The state of the RF output power on state can be set to be always off in the EMF menu of the RF block User defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the File menu The following table gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings The other presets can be found in the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands Chapter Remote Control Commands Description 1411 4060 32 4 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings The list below the table shows the settings that are not affected by the PRESET key Table 4 1 Preset state important generator settings Uninterrupted level setting Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key e Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator menu e Power on settings Level EMF menu e Network settings Setup menu e EC IEEE bus address Setup menu e IDN identification Setup menu e Password and settings protected by passwords Setup menu e Start Stop Gui Update Setup menu e Display settings Setup menu 1411 4060 32 4 7 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A General Configuration of Instrument Setup Key The SETUP key opens the Setup menu The Setup menu is divided into several sections e The System section is used to set general instrument parameters e The Test sec
236. ent Data 4 33 Elle Mer tma ue ttt t aes 4 34 Storing Instrument Settings File 4 34 Loading Instrument Settings File 4 36 File Management File 4 37 IV 1 E 4 Contents Instrument Functions R amp S SMC100A 1411 4060 32 RF Signals RE ene e td A eel 4 39 Overview of RF Signal ene 4 39 RF Frequency cT 4 40 Frequency Menu eese ier E trn nnn nie 4 41 RE Phase cuca a e UR n mie iet ecu radios 4 42 Phase Men iii ete dest ae E e aE ee 4 42 RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator sesssssss 4 44 Reference Oscillator Menu 4 44 POWER VICWER 2 xe oet st aut eati e tee ei m in mate MM et af 4 46 NRP Z Power Viewer Mem 4 46 RE Level uite ef et dett P neat ace repone oes no E Eo des 4 52 Level Menu rs ta ERR ertt UA e 4 53 Overvoltage Protechon enne 4 55 RE EME it a tie duet deu 4 56 EMF MNU eene ENEE eeu teas eee idera teer do Pedes eleva led 4 56 Automatic Level Control ALC ssssssssssssssseseseeeeermeren nnne 4 57 Automatic Level Control Menu 4 57 User COMEN it AA AA ea Ee 4 59 User Correction Men iiec at beet tel etas d gez 4 59 Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data 4 65 NiuDcc daiat 4 66 Frequency Sweep Menu sss eene 4 67 Level Sweep Men 4 74 leie TE e ert eie lile uti beetles 4 80 Modulation Gources eene 4 80 Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations or Other Ope
237. ent level value The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW STEP 0 5 SOUR POW MAN 15 The value entered with command SOUR SWE POW STEP sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR POW MAN has no effect the command only triggers the next sweep step However the value has to be in the sweep range start to stop value In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop level is possible 1411 4060 32 4 75 E 4 Sweep Mode 1411 4060 32 Extern Single Extern Step R amp S SMC100A Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single sweep always starts at the start level The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR EXT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the curren
238. ents Setup System esseeeeeeeeeeeeereeererseeeeeenen 4 9 Hardware Config Setup System sese 4 10 Gui Update Setup System ssssssssssssssem 4 11 Software Options Setup System ssesnnennenessn enren reeee rener rnee ee 4 11 Install SW Option Setup System ooooocococccccnccccononcononcnoncnnnnannnnnos 4 13 E EE 4 13 Test Point Setup Test oooconcncccnncnnnccncononccnnnncononnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnno 4 14 Check Front Panel Geiup Test 4 15 Date and Time Getup Environment sss 4 15 Network Settings Setup Environment eese 4 16 Display Settings Getup Environment 4 20 Remote Channel Settings Setup Remote suus 4 20 Protection Setup Protection sss 4 21 Security Setup Protection ooococonnnccconnnccccconcnncnnnnaniccnnnrnn crac rra 4 22 Save Recall Setup Setting ooocoonccccnnnnccccnnnnicccnnnoraccnnnanncnnnr o nnnrnnnn 4 24 Recall Menu Setup Gettnges 4 25 Save Menu Setup Geittngs eer reerrreserrssrrer nsere 4 25 Loading Instrument Settings Setup Settings 0aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 4 27 File Management File nnne 4 29 Factory Preset Getup Zetting 4 30 Switching to Manual Control Local Key ssssse 4 31 Messages Info Key s cm ineo mite alte ede ce e be 4 31 Help System Help Key cc cccccececccceedeecceeedenceteeeeneceeedacenedeccceeteeneaeeeeeaaenetedee 4 32 Storing and Loading Instrum
239. ep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control command SOUR SWE FREO MODE STEP SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1 MHz TRIG FSW SOUR EXT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle that is started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE FREO MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR EAUT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger 4 70 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section Execute Single Sweep RF Frequency Sweep Reset Sweep RF Frequency Sweep Start Freq RF Frequency Sweep Stop Freq RF Frequency Sweep Center Freq RF Fr
240. equency Sweep Span RF Frequency Sweep Current Freq RF Frequency Sweep Spacing RF Frequency Sweep 1411 4060 32 Mode Single only Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREO MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR SING SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ EXEC Resets the sweep The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there Remote control command SWE RES ALL Sets the start frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ STAR 100MHz Sets the stop frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ STOP 500MHz Sets the center frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ CENT 300MHz Sets the span Remote control command SOUR FREQ SPAN 400MHz Displays the current frequency If Step is set the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR FREQ MAN 300MHz Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN LOG Sweep Mode Shape RF Frequency Sweep Step Lin Log RF Frequency Sweep 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence shape f Sawtooth Triangle stop frequency start frequency stop frequency start frequency sawtooth shape triangle shape One
241. ernal flah memory RCL 4 activates the instrument setting of the file Test4 savrcl Compliant MMEMory MDIRectory directory name The command creates a new subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to create a directory tree The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MDIR carrier creates the subdirectory carrier in the current directory SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 18 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt file_destination gt This command renames an existing file if no path is specified for lt file_destination gt Otherwise the file is moved to the specified path and stored under the original file name or if specified a new file name It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt msus_source gt lt file_destination gt lt msus_destination gt The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MOVE testl savrcl keepl savrcl renames the file test1 savrcls as keepl savrcl MMEM MOVE testl savrcl smc_one keepl savrcl moves the file test1 savrcl1 to the subdirectory smc_one and stores it there under the name keepl savrcl SCP
242. ert Row Delete Range Inserts a new row before the marked row Remote control command n a Inserts new rows before the marked row The number of rows to be inserted can be defined in an entry window OK Cancel Remote control command n a Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically entered in the ucor list Fill User Correction Data From Range Select column to fill Frequency Hz Start Value 43 000 00 Hz End Value 123 000 00 Hz Increment Value 5000 00 Hz e The start line and the number of rows to be filled are defined under From and Range The column to be filled is selected under Select column to fill Depending on the selection here the default for start end and increment value are set As the settings are interdependent a change of one parameter may result in the automatic change of one or more of the other parameters The filling of the column with the selected value settings is started with button Fill Remote control command n a Calls the menu to activate the filling of the user correction list with level values acquired by the selected power sensor see section Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data 4 62 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Import Export User Correction 1411 4060 32 User Correction Save The list is saved under its current name Important Save a list only after filling both columns freq
243. essages Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Remote control command SYST ERR Or SYST ERR ALL Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signalled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history Remote control command SYST SERR Info Window Display A few operating states and the current message are displayed in the info line see also chapter 9 Error Messages The info window with a list of current permanent messages and a detailed description of each message can be opened with the INFO key The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages in the order of their occurrence
244. eters NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse Example PULM SOUR EXT selects the external modulation source PULM POL INV selects inverted polarity NORMal Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 69 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce PULM SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects the source for pulse modulation Pulse Parameters INTernal The internally generated rectangular signal is used for the pulse modulation EXTernal The signal applied externally via the PULS EXT connector is used for the pulse modulation Example PULM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source PULM STAT ON activates the pulse modulation INTernal Compliant SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates the pulse modulation The pulse generator and the output of the video sync signal is activated automatically Output of signal can be switched off with command SOURce PGEN OUTPut STATe OFF Example PULM STAT ON activates pulse modulation with the modulation source selected under SOURce PULM SOURCe Compliant SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger at the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG the pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external trigger signal
245. ettings lt filesize_in_bytes gt File size The size 0 is returned for a directory Example MMEM CAT var reads out all files at the highest directory level of the flash memory Response 127145265 175325184 test DIR 0 temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savracl STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory var contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcl and waveform wv which have different file types MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt path gt This command reads out the number of files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CAT LENG var reads out the number of files at the highest directory level of the flash memory Response 1 there is 1 file at the highest directory level of the memory stick 1411 4060 32 6 15 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SCPI Device specific MMEMory CDIRectory directory name This command changes the default directory This directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them It is also possible to change to a higher directory using two dots Example MMEM CDIR test changes from the current directory level to the subdirectory test SCPI Compliant MMEMo
246. ettings include various functions such as e Setting a defined basic setup using the PRESET key section Default Instrument Settings Preset Key page 4 6 e Switching from remote control to manual control using the LOCAL key section Switching to Manual Control Local Key page 4 31 e Configuring the generator and its interfaces in the Setup menu e g setting the IEC IEEE bus address starting an adjustment querying instrument data section General Configuration of Instrument Setup Key page 4 8 e Calling up the online help using the HELP key section Help System Help Key page 4 32 e Querying messages using the INFO key section Messages Info Key page 4 37 The RF signal is configured in the RF function block e CW mode section RF Signal RF page 4 39 e Frequency and Level Sweep mode section Sweep Mode page4 66 The analog and external digital modulations are activated in the Mod function block e Amplitude Modulation section Amplitude Modulation AM page 4 81 e Frequency Modulation section Frequency Modulation FM page 4 83 e Phase Modulation section Phase Modulation PhiM page 4 86 e Pulse Modulation section Pulse Modulation page 4 88 The internal LF generators the LF frequency sweep and the pulse generator is configured in the Mod Gen function block e LF Frequency Sweep section LF Frequency Sweep Menu p
247. eturned and not the entire error text Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see section Error Messages If the error queue is empty 0 is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor COUNt The command queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty O is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 1 one error has occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see Chapter 9 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to the command STATus QUEue NEXT The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out
248. g eay cryptsoft com and software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com LINUXO is a trademark of Linus Torvalds Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing R amp SO is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 1411 4060 32 01 2 R amp S SMC100A Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview CD ROM including complete operating manual and compiled online help provided in the file inside pocket Data Sheet Safety Instructions Customer Information Regarding Produict Disposal Certificate of Quality EC Certificate of Conformity Support Center Address List of R amp S Representatives User documentation for the Signal Generator R amp S SMC100A Operating Manual Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 2 Chapter 2 Getting Started 3 Chapter 3 Operation 4 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions 5 Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 6 Chapter 6 Remote Control Description of Commands 7 Chapter 7 8 Chapter 8 Maintenance and Interfaces 9 Chapter 9 Error Messages 10 Annex Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1411 4060 32 RE E 1 Grouped Safety Messages Make sure to read through and observe the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde 8 Schwarz group of c
249. g the commands SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt STOP or MANual Example LFO FREQ MODE SWE sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt STOP MANual become effective 1411 4060 32 6 51 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz 1 MHz This command sets the start frequency for the LF Sweep mode Example RST activates all presettings LFO SWE MODE AUTO sets the AUTO sweep mode i e each trigger triggers a complete sweep TRIG FSW SOUR SING sets the SINGle trigger mode i e the sweep is triggered by the command LFOutput SWEep EXECute or TRG FO FREQ STAR 100 kHz sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz FO FREQ STOP 200 kHz sets the stop frequency of the LF sweep to 200 kHz FO FREQ MODE SWE sets the LF sweep mode FO SWE EXEC a one off LF sweep from 100 kHz to 200 kHz is performed The linear step width is 1 kHz with a dwell time of 15 ms preset values Compliant SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz 1 MHz This command sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep Example FO FREQ STOP 200 kHz sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep to 200 kHz FO FREQ STAR 100 kHz sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz Compliant SOURce LFOutput STATe ON OFF The c
250. h frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Automatic Level Control Menu The Auto Level Control menu is opened in the RF Mod function block or in the setup menu under RF iL RE RE ON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The combined ALC UCOR menu provides access to the automatic level control settings in the Auto Level Control section Automatic Level Control State Off Sample amp Hold Search Once 1411 4060 32 4 57 E 4 Automatic Level Control ALC R amp S SMC100A The lower sections provide access to the function User Correction see section User Correction page 4 59 State ALC Activates deactivates internal level control Off Internal level control is deactivated Sample amp Hold Remote control command SOUR POW ALC OFF SOUR POW ALC OMOD SHOL Auto Default state Level control is automatically adapted to the operating states Remote control command SOUR POW ALC AUTO On Internal level control is permanently activated Remote control command SOUR POW ALC ON Note The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMC is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hold In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level i
251. he SETUP key under Environment The menu is divided into the password sections and the security settings section In the password section the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are defined and changed In the security section the remote interfaces are enabled and disabled A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Change Security Password OldPaswod New Password Confirm Password A orange Passwora Security Settings USB Device Enable y Lan Connections Enable y Security Password Accept Accept Security Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings Settings accordingly Remote control command n a User Name Indicates the user name used for access to the operating system Linux Remote control commands n a Old password User Enters the currently used password Default is root Remote control commands n a New Password User Enters the new password Remote control commands n a Confirm New Enters the new password for conformation Password User The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Remote control commands n a 1411 4060 32 4 22 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings New
252. he step width and dwell time SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 20 MHz SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWEL1 12 ms 1411 4060 32 6 73 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A 4 Select the trigger mode TRIGger FSWeep SOURce SINGle 5 Select the sweep mode and activate the sweep SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep 6 Trigger the sweep SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECute Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF paid id Elba Igel ege a meesten 000 a 00 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic Pp SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LlNear 0 STOP STAR ES E E E E LA egene eene emeng ewm E DC LL iS A E SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 9999 PCT 1411 4060 32 6 74 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 3 ms 10 s The command sets the time taken for each frequency step of the sweep Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Example SWE DWEL 12 ms sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a freque
253. hich the file to be deleted or copied is located The window to the right lists all files in this directory The file to be deleted or copied can be highlighted The path is indicated above the directory window Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user Files Selects the file Remote control command n a Cut Cuts the selected file It can be pasted into a different directory using the Paste button Remote control command MMEM DEL var test savercl Copy Copies the selected file It can be pasted into a different or the same directory using the Paste button When pasting the file into the same directory file name Copy of lt filename gt is given automatically When pasting the file into a different directory the original filename is kept Remote control command MMEM COPY var user setl wv var user set2 wv 1411 4060 32 4 29 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Paste Pastes the file that has been copied or cut before Remote control command n a Rename Renames the selected file or directory The new name can be entered in the New Filename window Remote control command MMEM MOVE test02 dm_iqd set2 dm_iqd Delete Deletes the selected file Before the file is deleted a message appears prompting the user to confirm deletion of the file Remote control command MMEM DEL var test savercl Create New Directory Creates a new directory The name of
254. i e the most recent message is displayed first In the lower section of the window additional information on the highlighted message is displayed 1411 4077 62 3 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display A history of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on can be called with the History button The most recent message is displayed first ALCAuto Info Info line Text 221 Pep value greater than defined upp List of current messages with short message text Wrn No pending errors Detailed description for highlighted message Delete Delete all History Buttons The messages are color coded according to their level Device specific messages are red info and remote control error are black The level is also indicated in the Lev column Err Sys or Info Column SCPI indicates the SCPI error code With the aid of the softkey buttons error messages can be cleared and a history of all messages called Delete Clears the highlighted message This button is available only if the history of the message is displayed Remote control command n a Delete All Clears all messages This button is available only if the history of the message is displayed Remote control command SYST ERR ALL Each time a SYSTem ERRor ALL query is sent the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared History Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on The mos
255. ible value DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value UP This keyword increments the parameter value DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SOURce FREQuency MAXimum eturns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt 1411 4060 32 This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block 6 3 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A Common Commands The common commands are taken from the standard IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 Identical commands have an identical effect in different instruments The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands affect the status reporting system which is described in detail in Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics command CCT CT CT ERR RE EE RRE ES RER ell leese EE IS EE LL EN RE EE mee E p ooo je m 0 em RRE ES EE Ew RRE AO meme mm Ee pwmemmesem CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and OPERation register to zero The command does not change the enable and transition parts of the registers It deletes the output
256. ical and electronic waste in accordance with the ElektroG Act Please contact your local service representative to dispose of the product 1171 0200 52 01 00 Certified Quality System DIN EN ISO 9001 DIN EN QUALITATSZERTIFIKAT Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produktes entschie den Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Management systems entwickelt gefertigt und gepr ft Das Rohde amp Schwarz Management system ist zertifiziert nach DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 2004 9100 DIN EN ISO 14001 DOS REG NO 001954 OM UM CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY Dear Customer you have decided to buy a Rohde A Schwarz product You are thus as sured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available This product was developed manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality manage ment system standards The Rohde amp Schwarz quality manage ment system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 2004 CERTIFICAT DE QUALIT Cher Client vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apres les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d veloppement la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de ges tion qualit Le systeme de gestio
257. ically matched to the applied AC voltage see rear panel There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC supply connector is on the rear of the unit see below Switching On 1 Connect the signal generator to the AC supply by means of the supplied power cable Since the instrument is a protection class equipment it should only be connected to a socket with a protective earth contact 2 Press the main power switch on the rear of the instrument to position I 3 After power up the instrument is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode depending on the state of the ON STANDBY switch on the instrument front see below Note The power switch may remain on for any period of time Switching off is required only if the instrument should be completely isolated from the AC supply gt O 4 Press the ON STANDBY switch on the front panel the green LED must be on 5 After booting the software the instrument is ready for operation All modules in the instrument are supplied with power 1411 4077 62 1 13 E 1 Putting into Operation R amp S SMC100A Start Display and Booting the R amp S SMC After instrument switch on the Linux operating system boots first and then the instrument firmware After booting is completed the block diagram of the signal generator is displayed The green lighting LED on the front panel indicates that the instrument is ready to be operated The settings that were
258. ich are possible on the instrument are implemented Error messages indicate the settings which cannot be implemented The stored file is transferred from one instrument to another using the memory stick General file management functions such as copying and moving data are available in the File Manager submenu 1411 4060 32 4 24 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Recall Menu Setup Settings The settings available in the File menu depend on the operation selected under Select Operation Select Operation Save Y Select Operation Selects the file function Save Calls the menu for storing the current instrument setting Recall Calls the menu for calling up a stored instrument setting Save Menu Setup Settings If Save is selected under Select Operation the File menu provides options for storing the current instrument setting in a file Select Operation recent data sets File Name Save Save File SES Imm 1 Imm 2 Manager Recent data sets File Displays the files last used The entire path is shown in plain text Remote control command n a 1411 4060 32 4 25 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Directory File File List File File Name File Save File Save Immediate x File Management 1411 4060 32 Selects the directory in which the file is to be stored The window opposite lists all settings files in this directory A new directory can be created i
259. ied frequency and level indication and the display of the active menu e The Winbar button moves the Winbar to the forground The button that was active last in the Winbar is highlighted The associated menu is activated by clicking the rotary knob Enter e The SETUP key opens the complete menu tree Menus are closed with the ESC CLOSE key e The cursor can also be moved with the ESC CLOSE key However the function of this key depends on the current cursor position Parameter field editing mode The editing mode is terminated and the previous value is restored exception value variations with the rotary knob cannot be cancelled Menu area The cursor is set to another menu area Menu The menu is closed and the cursor changes to the next higher control level 1411 4077 62 3 11 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Frequency level field Setting Parameters The cursor is set on the previously active menu or if no menu was active on the first function block in the diagram Function block in the diagram The cursor is set on the first menu in the Winbar If no menus are open the current cursor position remains unchanged Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Edits the frequency or level in the entry fields of the header area Press FREQ or LEVEL key Enter value Press CTRL F frequency or CTRL L level Enter value
260. igger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered individually either by varying the Current Frequency value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a LFOutput FREQ MAN command under remote control With manual control the frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value Eden under SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing With remote control the frequency increases by the value specified under LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG which each sent LFO FREQ MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each trigger triggers one sweep step only The frequency increases by the value entered under SOURce LFOutput SWEep STEP Example LFO SWE MODE AUTO selects auto mode SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in an LF sweep The command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP as follows The following applies for linear sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts STOP STARt STEP LIN 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The S
261. ing is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used Remote control command MEMM LOAD STAT 2 var user testfile savrcl RCL 2 Loads the selected configuration from one of the three intermediate memories If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used A message appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory Remote control command RCL 1 4 28 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings File Management File The File Management menu provides all the functions required for file management Directories can be created and files copied deleted and moved between the directories on the devices internal memory flash and memory stick File Type an Files var smc Data dir Lists i e EepromData cu Rename Delete Create New pir File Type Selects the file types to be indicated If a file type with a specific file extension Isw is selected only files with this extension are indicated in the selected directory Remote control command n a Directory Selects the directory in w
262. ion values for the user correction list can be acquired by means of R amp S NRP power sensors The NRP sensor isconnected to one of the USB interfaces Configuration of the connection is performed in the Power Sensor menu see Power Viewer The filling of the ucor list with measurement data is performed in the ucor list editor see above Edit New User Correction Data User Correction In the editor the frequencies for which the correction values are to be acquired are entered in the frequency column either manually or by means of the Fill menu Note Do not save the list at this point because the frequency entries are lost as long as there are no entries for the level column also In the following these entries are automatically acquired by the connected power sensor All level correction values for the given frequency values are measured using the power sensor and automatically filled in the selected list The list is automatically stored and recalled again after filling The Fill with Sensor button of the Edit User Correction Data menu opens the associated menu Used SMC Settings For Measurement Modulation jor CW Amplitude 30 00 dBm Use SParameter on Attenuator Mode Fixed Fixed Range PEP In 5980 0 6 000 0 dBm Sensor 1 NRP 211 S N 900003 List To Fill s S SMUProjekte_RS_SMU21 Execute The menu indicates the relevant generator settings The Execute button is only enabled if a sensor is
263. is 5 3 MANUAL aia ia 1 24 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Remote control A Hawi ere 5 1 SWI CNOVO cid dee 5 2 Remote to local switchover 5 2 RENAN utilidad 4 32 4 40 6 22 Reset Instrument settings 1 18 4 6 6 7 6 116 Delta Phase Display 4 47 6 70 Factory seitimge 6 113 Status reporting system 5 29 Restart Network Setup ssssuus 4 18 Restoring the previous value 3 18 REVISIONS ce b i be aei 4 10 RF blOCK ni pied 2 4 frequency A 4 44 6 51 6 53 OFF iade Eine 9 1 ON OFF key 4 41 6 26 output Power on state sssss 4 60 6 27 LOVE RA stes 4 58 6 74 signal Phase adjustment 4 47 6 70 SOCUON eric ete Eo ep aont 2 1 A itera eed RE ee Fee dn 9 2 RJ 45 cabie 1 21 Rotary knob sssssse eene 1 5 S Sample and Hold mode 4 61 6 73 Save Immedate 4 28 4 37 6 7 instrument settings 4 28 4 37 6 7 6 22 SCPI conformity Imformafion 6 1 error messages sssssssse een 9 5 1E E81 APE EA eda e EE a ed eats 5 1 1411 4060 32 10 17 Index Screen Saver Setup 4 21 6 14 Search Once AC 4 63 6 74 Select ASCII Destination User Correction data 4 70 Source User Correction data 4 70 Select Operation File menu 4 27 4 36 Select Test Point
264. is exclusively operated via remote control Example DISP PSAV ON activates screen saver mode Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 11 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data that the R amp S Signal Generator returns to the controller This affects all query commands which return a list of numerical data or block data Reference is made to this in the descriptions of the commands Sg TT est FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed pu O FORMat SREGister ASCii BINary HEXadecimal OCTal moo FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed The command determines the data format which the R amp S Signal Generator uses to return data When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument the instrument detects the data format automatically In this case the value set here is irrelevant Parameters ASCii Numerical data is transferred as plain text separated by commas PACKed Numerical data is transferred as binary block data The format within the binary data depends on the command The various binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types SCPI Compliant FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped The command determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block This only affects blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally Parameters NORMal the R amp S Signal Generator expects with setting commands
265. isions If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated in a Rohde amp Schwarz product do not use any other settings or functions than those described in the product documen tation Otherwise this may be hazardous to your health since the laser beam can cause irreversible damage to your eyes Never try to take such products apart and never look into the laser beam Prior to cleaning disconnect the product from the AC supply Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluent for cellulose lacquers Sheet 4 Customer Information Regarding Product Disposal The German Electrical and Electronic Equipment ElektroG Act is an implementation of the following EC directives e 2002 96 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and e 2002 95 EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment RoHS Product labeling in accordance with EN 50419 Once the lifetime of a product has ended this product must not be disposed of in the standard domestic refuse Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept for the environmental friendly disposal or recycling of waste material and fully assumes its obligation as a producer to take back and dispose of electr
266. ith status error and warning messages e The block diagram shows the instrument configuration the signal characteristic as well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphics elements Active menus and info windows are displayed on top of the block diagram Freq Level 1 000 000 000 0 cnz 30 00 d8m gt ALC Auto nfo Mod Gen config On corta corto RF Iv 1411 4077 62 3 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display Frequency and Level Setting Display Frequency level settings and a few status messages see below are displayed in the header field of the screen The display may vary depending on the instrument s operating mode e Inthe sweep mode the current frequency or level of the output signal is displayed e f user correction is active the status message UCorr is displayed in the info line It should be noted that the signal at the RF output may differ from the indicated value by a set offset frequency or level see sections RF Frequency and RF Level in chapter 4 The frequency and level indication can be enlarged so that it covers the complete display of the R amp S SMC by using the DIAGR key This key toggles between block diagram magnified frequency and level indication and the display of the active menu Freq Level 1 000 000 000 0 crz 30 00 a8m Fra 1 000 000 000 0 GHz Level 30 00 dBm Info Panel for large value di
267. itive slope of the external trigger signal Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT SLOP POS The pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external trigger signal Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG External Gate only Selects the polarity of the Gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Positive Negative The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT GATE POL NORM The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is low Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT GATE POL INV LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMC100A LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block An LF generator providing sinusoidal signals in the frequency range 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz is available for the basic unit without additional equipment options The internal LF generator is the internal source for the analog modulations AM and FM PhiM and as the signal source for the LF output at the front of the instrument The LF generator settings can be made both in the modulation menus and in the LF Output menu The settings are effective for all modulations using the internal modulation source For example a change to the frequency of the LF generator automatically has an effect on AM modulation if internal source is selected as the AM modulation source i e Int is selected as Source
268. kHz Device specific SOURce FREQuency STEP MODE USER DECimal This command activates USER or deactivates DECimal1 the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the frequency values UP DOWN The command is linked to the command Variation Active for manual control i e the command also activates deactivates the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the rotary knob Example FREQ STEP 50 kHz sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50 kHz FREQ STEP MODE USER actives this step width for frequency variation with the rotary knob manual control and with frequency values UP DOWN remote control DECimal Device specific SOURce FREQuency STOP 300 kHz RFmax RFmax depending on model This command sets the stop frequency for the sweep mode STOP can be less than STARt This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ CENt and SOUR FREQ SPAN i e changing these values causes the STARt value to change and vice versa STOP CENTer SPAN 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the Of fset value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if offset is set to 0 The value range for other Offset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 kHz Offset RFmax Offset
269. l computer is large enough to take the file In this case the setting for the IEC IEEE bus terminator is irrelevant This command can be used to read transfer stored instrument settings directly from to the instrument The binary data block has the following structure 234 lt block_data gt always comes first in the binary block number indicates how many digits the subsequent length entry has 2 in example number indicates the number of subsequent bytes 34 in example binary block data binary block data for the specified length Example MMEM DATA TEST1 savrcl 43767 binary data writes the block data to the file test1 savrcl MMEM DATA TEST1 SAVRCL sends the data of the file rest1 savrcl from the R amp S Signal Generator to the control computer in the form of a binary block SCPI Compliant MMEMory DCATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories of the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The directories are output in a list the list entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM DCAT reads out the subdirectories of the current directory Response test wave digital the subdirectories test wave and digital exist in the current directory SCPI Device specific MMEMory DCATalog LENGth
270. l is retained or whether the stored level setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded RST does not affect this setting Parameters INCLude The stored level is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded EXCLude The RF level is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded The current level is retained Example POW RCL INCL the stored level is set if the Recall command is called Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 63 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude Minimum level Maximum level The command limits the maximum RF output level in CW and SWEEP mode lt does not influence the LEVEL display or the response to the POW query command Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 10 or POW LIM 10 limits the RF level to maximum 10 dBm SOURce POWer MANual Minimum level Maximum level In Sweep mode SOUR POW MODE SWE the command sets the level for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN Here only level values between the settings SOUR GON STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR POW MAN command As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the Offset value is
271. le prefix uco The file name and the directory to which the file is saved are user selectable Note Save a list only after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Edit User Correction Data smc mod Frequency Hz Enters the frequency to which the level correction value applies Note The Fill function allows to automatically enter any number of frequencies with freeley selectable range and increment Using the Fill With Sensor function of the Edit sub menu requires only the entry of the fre quency values The level values are automati cally acquired by the connected power sensor Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET SEL Ucorl SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz Power dB Enters the level correction value to which the specified frequency applies The values can be entered manually or automatically with the Fill With Sensor function Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET SEL Ucorl SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB Goto Selects the row for editing Goto First m Goto Last If Goto Row is selected a window opens for entering the requested row Remote control command n a it is not possible to change individual positions of the list 4 61 E 4 User Correction Edit Insert Row Insert Range Fill Fill With Sensor 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Calls a selection of possible actions described below Ins
272. left together with the error code Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Note The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Extern reference out of range or disconnected 50 External reference is selected but no external signal is applied or the signal is out of range Remedy Check the selected reference signal source internal or external in the Reference Oscillator menu Setup Change setting to internal if no approriate external source is available SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Adjustment data invalid 183 Adjustment data are invalid and must be restored Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Adjustment data missing 182 Adjustment data are missing Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages Adjustment failed 180 Adjustment could not be executed Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the device see section Adjustment SCPI Device
273. les are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and one or more parameters if any Examples RST RESET resets the device ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable register ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Device specific commands Hierarchy Device specific commands are of hierarchical structure see figure below The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the command system SOURce For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC This command lies in the fourth level of the SOURce It sets the coupling of the external signal source to AC SOURce Example for the tree structure of the SCPI command systems the SOURce system 1411 4060 32 5 11 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Multiple key words Optional key words Long and short form Parameters Numeric suffix 1411 4060 32 Some key words occur on several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the stru
274. link setup The IP address computer name is part of the visa resource string used by the programs for identification and control of the instrument The visa resource string has the form TCPIP ipaddr inst0 INSTR ipaddr has to be replaced by the IP address or the computer name of the instrument For instance if the instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 TCPIP 192 1 2 3 inst0 INSTR is the valid resource name Specification of instO in the resource string is optional In this example also TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR is therefore a valid resource string A resource string with computer name could be TCPIP RSSM1 INSTR for instance TCPIP designates the network protocol used and INSTR indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used Note The visa resource string is indicated in the Setup Remote Ethernet menu If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource name The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource name In the example below the program Measurement amp Automation Explorer from National Instruments is used for setting up an Ethernet remote control link Link setup with this program is easy and first tests can be performed The R amp S Signal Generator is preconfigured for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol If this configuration is used the computer name must be entered at the position of the IP address It is also pos
275. lors C MODEM 19 128Kbit s 256 Colors C SLOW lt 19kKbit s 256 Colors Fuzzy View Only Auto Scaling Options UseDSMPlugin No Plugin detected Config Proxy Repeater 3 Enter IP address or host name of R amp S SMC in input line VNC Server 4 Initialize the connection by pressing the Connect button A message requesting the password appears NC Authentication Va Password iia coro 5 Enter the VNC password defined in the Environment Security section of the Setup menu of R amp S SMC default instrument The connection is established when the Log On button is pressed After the connection is established the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S SMC can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in chapter 3 section Legend of Front Panel Controls Direct control on the R amp S SMC is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the remote access Close Remote Access Connection via Ultr VNC The connection can be closed on the external PC by closing the VNC Viewer program Closing the connection does not disable it It can be established again any time 1411 4077 62 1 21 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Content
276. lows instrument settings to be transferred easily between different signal generators since once again only the settings which differ from the preset values have to be adjusted If a list e g a frequency level list is used for a list of user correction data a reference to this list is also stored The list is also loaded when the associated instrument setting is loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime or it is not available on a different instrument an error message appears if an attempt is made to access this list after the instrument setting has been loaded The associated setting or operating mode is only started after the user has selected an existing list If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used Note Lists are stored and loaded in the appropriate menus For example the user correction data list is created and stored in the User Correction menu When loading an instrument setting it is possible to select whether the current frequency and level setting is to be retained or whether the stored settings are to be activated It is possible to delete stored instrument settings A file can be copied by loading it with Recall and then storing it under a new name Settings can be transferred easily between instruments with different equipment options and or firmware versions because only the settings which differ from the preset values are affected When settings are loaded only those wh
277. ments For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands messages are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI This section assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sections Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers The program examples for IEC IEEE bus programming are all written in VISUAL BASIC A condition for programming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL Niglobal bas and VBIB32 Vbib 32 bas are added to the projects Note Manual control is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contr
278. modulation Correlation PM STATe ON deactivates frequency Compliant modulation 1411 4060 32 6 60 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level level control and level correction of the RF signal Other units can also be used instead of dBm e byentering the unit directly after the numerical value example POW 0 5V e bychanging the DEFault unit in the UNIT system see the command UNIT POWER The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted Command Parameters Default unit SOURce POWer ALC OMODe SHOLd Pf SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF AUTO Pf SOURce POWer LEVEL IMMediate AMPLitude dBm See data sheet SOURce POWer LEVEL IMMediate OFFSet 100 100 dB oe SOURce POWer LEVEL IMMediate RCL INCLlude EXCLude a 2 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude dBm SOURce POWer MODE FIXed CW SWEep PO SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 100 dB dB SOURce POWer STEP MODE USER DECimal EE POR SOURce POWer ALC OMODe SHOLd The command sets the level control mode which becomes active when automatic level control is deactivated ALC OFF Parameter SHOLd Level control is activated briefly if the level or frequency changes ALC OFF Sample amp Hold Example POW ALC OFF deactivates automatic level control POW ALC OMOD SHOL level control is briefly activated if the
279. modulations which use the same modulation sources 1411 4060 32 4 83 E 4 Frequency Modulation FM R amp S SMC100A Frequency Modulation FM Source Ext y FM Deviation 1 000 00 kHz y FM Sensitivity 1000 00 Hz Volt Adjust FM Offset Mod Ext Coupling State FM Activates deactivates FM modulation Activation of FM deactivates phase modulation Remote control command SOUR FM STAT ON FM Source FM Selects the source for the FM signal Int Selects the internal source for FM modulation Remote control command SOUR FM SOUR INT Ext Selects the external source for analog frequency modulation The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR FM SOUR EXT FM Deviation Sets the modulation depth in Hz The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message is displayed Remote control command SOUR FM DEV 1kHz SOUR FM EXT DEV 10kHz 1411 4060 32 4 84 E 1 R amp S SMC100A FM Sensitivity Adjust FM Offset Mod Ext Coupling LF Gen Freq FM 1411 4060 32 Frequency Modulation FM Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in Hz
280. mp logical AND PPE Paral OR of all bits o ISTflag response to parallel poll Overview of status registers 1411 4060 32 5 24 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command STB or a serial poll The STB is linked to the SRE Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a Service Request SRQ is generated on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using command SRE and read using SRE Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Da d CL Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably
281. mplete path is specified the file is stored in the specified path MMEM CDIR var rs gen SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 testl savrcl If the parameter only contains the file name the file is stored in the default directory which was selected with the MMEM CDIR command List of file extensions assigned automatically in R amp S Signal Generator List type Contents File suffix Instrument State Instrument settings savrcl User Correction User defined level correction values UCO pues m RRE Dew A wem eeneg uemme 7 em puso 00 A ewm A Meme Oo Dumas A A wmm puse A quem O mme 00 em 1411 4060 32 6 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description MMEMory CATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories and files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The response has the following format lt used bytes in this directory gt lt free bytes on this disk gt lt file name gt lt file type gt lt filesize in bytes gt lt file name gt lt file type gt lt filesize in bytes gt The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Parameters lt file_name gt File or directory name lt file_type gt File type There are the following file types DIR directory ASCii ASCII file BINary Binary file and STATe file with instrument s
282. mpliant Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing SWE STEP 2 MHz sets the step width for linear sweep spacing to 2 MHz RF sweep The number of sweep steps for linear sweep spacing POINts is automatically set to 201 The value of SWE POINts is Device specific adjusted automatically 1411 4060 32 6 78 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 9999 PCT The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated for STARt lt STOP using the following formula New frequency Old frequency STEP LOG x Old frequency STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency The frequency is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is given in percent whereby the suffix PCT must always be used The command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency POINts for STARt lt STOP as follows POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LOG sets logarithmic sweep spacing SWE STEP LOG 10PCT sets the step
283. n be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SOURce FREQuency 1 5 kHz SOURce FREQuency 1 553 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the ect string Example SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 5PCT Special numeric The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as values special numerical values In the case of a query the associated numerical value is provided Example Setting command SOURce LFOutput VOLTage MAXimum Query SOURce LFOutput VOLTage Answer 4 MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEF DEFault denotes a preset value This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN INF NINF INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are division by zero subtraction or ad
284. n data obtained in the factory before delivery In addition customer data can be used for external level correction The customer data is obtained using a R amp S NRP power sensor External level correction is a protected function see service manual chapter 2 Adjustment Remote control command CAL LEV EXT DATA FACT 1411 4060 32 4 9 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Hardware Config Setup System In the Hardware Config menu the installed assemblies together with their variants and revision states can be displayed for servicing purposes The Hardware Config menu under System is opened using the SETUP key Counter Operation Time h 128 Power On Count 5818 Common Assembly Assembly Part Number More SMC100A 1411 4002k02 Revisi Basis Board 1406 6700 04 04 00 Revi COM FPGA 02 12 00 R 01 14 00 R Section Counter in the upper part of the menu shows the Operation Hours and the number of power on Power On Counter Remote control command DIAG INFO OTIM Response w37 DIAG INFO POC Response 147 A table below lists the installed assemblies It is divided into the sections Common Assembly and RF Assembly and Baseband Assembly Assembly Assembly name Part Number Part Number of assembly More Opens a dialog with additional information on serial number revision and slot of assembly
285. n is for instance the frequency variation of the reference oscillator which is immediately set Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Accepts value immediately Vary the value using the rotary Vary the value with the knob or the up down arrow keys up down arrow keys Confirms entries Press rotary knob or ENTER Press Enter key Exit entry field key or or one of the key combinations press uni key ALT F9 F10 F11 F12 1411 4077 62 3 16 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Setting Parameters Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Confirms entries in the menus with the Accept button Press Accept button Select Accept button with the arrow keys and press Enter Click Accept button Sets the entries in the instrument If the instrument function is active the new value is immediately calculated and set If the instrument function is not active the new confirmed value is calculated and set only when the function is switched on see front panel see front panel Restoring the Previous Value Setting Parameters Parameter variations with the rotary knob are immediately set and therefore not reversible Normally values cannot be restored also in the case of mouse control because no explicit confirmation is required in this case and entries are automatically confirmed when the entry or selection field is exited In the cas
286. n qualit de Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu conform ment aux normes DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 2004 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 11 02 00 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 2008 64 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation SMC100A 1411 4002 02 Signal Generator SMC B1 1411 6705 02 Reference Oscillator complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 2006 95 EC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 2004 108 EC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN 61010 1 2001 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 A3 2003 EN 55011 1998 A1 1999 A2 2002 Class B EN 61000 3 2 2000 A2 2005 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2008 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 2008 07 31 Central Quality Management MF QZ Radde 1411 4002 02 CE E 1 R amp S SMC100A User Documentation Contents of User Documentation for the Signal Generator R
287. n the File Manager File Manager button Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user The path can also be entered when the file is stored Displays the files which are in the selected directory If a file is highlighted it is overwritten when the file is stored Remote control command MMEM CAT Enter the file name of the file without file extension This file is then created Remote control command n a The file name is entered when the file is stored Stores the current instrument settings under the specified path Remote control command SAV 1 MEMM STOR STAT 1 var user testfile savrcl Stores the current instrument setting in one of the three intermediate memories These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the intermediate memory When the instrument is switched off the contents of the intermediate memories are retained Remote control command SAV 1 Calls the File Management menu Directories can be created and files managed in this menu see the section File Management File page 4 29 Remote control command n a 4 26 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Loading Instrument Settings Setup Settings If Recall is selected under Select Operation the File menu provides options for loading complete instrument settings Here it is possible to select whether the current or stored RF frequency and RF level settings are to
288. ncy sweep Device specific SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECute The command triggers a sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE SING1le The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SWE FREQ MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the frequency sweep SWE FREQ EXEC triggers a single frequency sweep Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 75 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the sweep mode The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Parameters AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered individually either by varying the Current Frequency value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a FREQ MAN command under remote control With manual control the frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value specified under SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing With remote control the frequency increases by the value specified under SWEep FREQ STEP LIN LOG Which each sent FREQ MAN comm
289. nd on the R amp S SMC Establishing the connection and installation of the remote control software on the external PC is described in chapter 1 section Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN After the connection is established the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S SMC can be remote accessed from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard Front panel keys which are not directly available on the keyboard can be substituted by key combinations or by the front panel key emulation panel see next section When the connection is set up direct control on the R amp S SMC is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the remote access For return to direct operation on the R amp S SMC the connection must be closed After closing the connection it is still enabled and can be established again any time see chapter 1 section Remote Access via an External Controller 1411 4077 62 3 25 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Legend of Front Panel Controls Legend of Front Panel Controls The following table lists all key functions available on the front panel Key combinations used on the PC keyboard to trigger key functions on the instrument front panel are also described Keyboard labels are described in alphabetical orde
290. ne any DIAGnostic commands the commands listed here are all Device specific All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not influenced by RST Command Parameters Default unit DIAGnostic BGINfo CATalog Query ony DIAGnostic INFO POCount ouenen FomceseowoWam TT DIAGnostic lt 1 2 gt MEASure POINt lt pointname gt Queryomy DIAGnostic BGINfo lt module name gt The command checks the modules available in the instrument using the variant and revision state If the command is sent without parameters being specified a complete list of all modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration If the command is sent with parameters a list of the specified modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas A list of modules names can be called up using the DIAG BGIN CATalog command Each entry for one module consists of four parts which are separated by space characters Module name Module stock number incl variant Module revision Module serial number Example DIAG BGIN CAT queries the instrument configuration Response MBRD returns the data of all available modules DIAG BGIN MBRD queries the configuration of the motherboard Response MBRD 1234 5678 02 1 5 3 100023 module motherboard with stock number 1234 5678 02 has revision 1 5 3 and serial numbe
291. nly updated after pressing the Get System Settings button Get System Settings Restart Network Hostname MAC Address 1411 4060 32 Retrieves the current system settings of the instrument The indications in the network menu are only updated after pressing this button Remote control command SYST COMM NETW GET Shuts down the network connection of the instrument amd subsequently re establishes the connection This function can be used top solve network problems Note Only the connection of the instrument to the network restarts the network itself is not affected Remote control command n a Enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMC Note The computer name can only be changed after protection level 1 is deactivated see section Protection Setup Protection A new entry is only accepted and the hostname changed after the Accept button is pressed A predefined name is indicated and can be used for network connections Remote control command SYST COMM NETW HOST RSSMC100A123456 Indicates the MAC address of the network adapter Remote control command SYST COMM NETW MAC General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Def Gateway 1411 4060 32 Selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually or if a Peer to Peer connection is used The selection is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Auto DHCP The
292. nne 6 4 CALibration Subsystem AA 6 7 DIAGnostic Subsystem nerais ia En En AAE ETERRA 6 9 RIES EVT ieia a tna aaa 6 11 FORMat SUDSYSteM mosca 6 12 MMEMory Subsystem ssssssseeee eene rra 6 13 OUTPut ZSubsveiem a enne 6 20 SENSe INITiate and READ Subsystem nsnsenessnnnrnnneeeerrnnrrnsereee 6 23 SOURce Subsystem eese eines eene dett nena aaa 6 31 SOURce AM Subsystem ocoocoocccccnonccccononcnccnnnnnccnnnno nan cnnnn mene 6 31 SOURce CORRection Subsystem oocooncccccnnccccccnnoncccnnnancncnnnnnnnnnnn nos 6 33 SOURce FM Subsystem oocoooooocccccconcccccnonccccnannncncnnno nac cnnnn nn rrnnn rra 6 42 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem eee 6 44 SOURce INPut Subsystem oooccconccccccnocccccconcncncnanoncccnnan cnc nana cnn 6 49 SOURce LFO utput Subsystem sse 6 49 SOURce MODulation Subsystem ssseseeseeeeeeeeereeerrreserrssrrerrseeens 6 57 SOURce PHASe Gubsvetem cnc rnnn rra 6 58 SOURce PM SubsysteM coonccccccnicccccnoncccnnnnneccnnnnneconnnnnnccnnnneccnnnnncnes 6 59 SOURce POWer Gubsvetem na nnnnn orcas 6 61 SOURce PULM and PGEN Subsystem ssssseeeeee 6 67 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem see 6 72 SOURce SWEep Subsystem ssssssseeene en 6 73 STATUS Gubsveiem eene 6 83 SYSTem Subsystem eese enne nennen nntte tentes 6 87 TEST Subsystem cece neti Dee ich atria 6 99 TRIGger Subsystem esee nente tenent EE tine
293. nne nennen nnne nnns 6 122 TRIGger PSWeep SQURcGa e ume A e aae a CERE n 6 122 IRIGger SWEep S OURC6 I nter tle ee n tr e bn re OR RR RR ER e EO 6 123 U OUNITTEANGUE coco RR 6 124 NIK ee EE e i io ee 6 124 1411 4060 32 10 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Index 8 Clara cir aida 5 2 EE 5 2 AD tt oe tls nel e 5 3 0 ONO OO iaa 9 11 1 100 Command Error sss 9 5 101 Invalid Character 9 10 102 Syntax emt 9 15 103 Invalid separator 9 10 104 Data type emt 9 7 108 Parameter not allowed 9 13 109 Missing poarameter 9 11 112 Program mnemonic too long 9 13 113 Undefined header 9 16 114 Header suffix out of range 9 9 123 Exponent too large ssss 9 7 124 Too many digits susss 9 15 128 Numeric data not allowed 9 11 131 Invalid suit 9 10 134 Suffix too long 9 15 138 Suffix not allowed 9 15 140 This modulation forces other modulations off 9 20 144 Character data too long 9 5 148 Character data not allowed 9 5 158 String data not allowed 9 14 161 Invalid block data 9 10 168 Block data not allowed 9 5 180 Adjustment failed 9 18 182 Adjus
294. nse to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll by means of the command IST The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the VISUAL BASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value 1411 4060 32 5 27 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Query by Means of Commands Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries The individual commands are listed in the description of the STATus Subsystem The returned value is always a number that represents the bit pattern of the register queried This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control or queried via the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet using command SYSTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error
295. nt Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Command Error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is enter
296. nt since the last readout The content of the EVEN part is deleted after being read out Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the Status Questionable Event register SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Questionable Condition register SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 85 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A STATus QUEStionable NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status
297. ntrol of the instrument in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics and commands for remote control in chapter 6 Remote Control Commands Chapter 9 Error Messages contains a list of possible status and error messages Legend for Front Panel View This section gives an overview of control elements and connectors on the front panel of the R amp S SMC Each element connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information 1 2 3 4 5 Qo ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SMC100A Freq Level 3 200 000 000 0 st 13 00 dmn 2290000 900 Oe e Info SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 kHz 3 2 GHz Figure 1 1 Front panel view 1411 4077 62 1 1 E 1 Legend for Front Panel View RES SMC100A SETUP 1 Keys for general instrument settings Y PRESET See chapter 4 section Sets the instrument to a defined state General Instrument HELP Settings La Displays context sensitive help text LOCAL Switches from REMOTE control to LOCAL manual control SETUP Opens the setup menu for configuring general instrument settings 2 Display Freq Level y 3 200 000 000 0 c 13 00 48m ALC Auto Display The display clearly shows all main settings and See chapter 3 section signal generator states Display The display is divided into two sections Frequency and level display with info line status bar Block diagram Display The block diagram shows the current c
298. o the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the ttraffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed Subsequently the ttraffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1411 4060 32 5 18 E 1 RES SMC100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit lt proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only a DCL is serviced with priority a GET Group Execute Trigger e g is only executed after the commands received before Each recognized command is immediately transmitted to the data set but not executed immediately The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them to the status reporting system The rest of a command line after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced After the syntax test the value range of the parameter is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter or a DCL it also requests the data set to perform the necessary instrument har
299. ob or press the ENTER key press the Enter key Use the numeric keys to enter the row index and terminate the entry by pressing the Enter key Insert row A row is inserted above the currently marked row If no row has been selected a row is inserted at the beginning of the list Select the row above which the new row is to be inserted Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Insert Row s button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Select the row above which the new row is to be inserted Mark the Insert Row s button and press the Enter key Click the row above which the new row is to be inserted Click the Insert Row s button Save list under a new name Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Save as button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Mark the Save as button and press the Enter key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Double click the Save as button Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Save list under the same name Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Save button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Mark the Save button and press the Enter key Double click the Save button Creat
300. ol command SYST SERR 1411 4060 32 9 3 E 1 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages The following list contains all error messages defined in SCPI in alphabetical order SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments The errors are assigned negative numbers The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Note The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Block data not allowed 168 The command contains legal block data which are not allowed at this point Example The command SOUR FREQ requires a numeric parameter FREQ 413a SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data not allowed 148 The character data is prohibited for this command or at this point of the command Example Command SOURce FREQuency requires a numeric parameter SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data too long 144 The character data element contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Command Error 100 Generic error message that cannot detect a more specific error SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 4 E 1 R amp S SMC1
301. omatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep yl The menu is used to select the source to enter the frequency of an external reference signal and to adjust the reference frequency The external mode corresponds to EFC mode Electronic Frequency Control External e External Reference Frequency 10 MHz Adjustment Adjustment Active Iv Adjustment DAC Value 5 000 1411 4060 32 4 44 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator Source Reference Oscillator External Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator Adjustment Active Reference Oscillator Adjustment DAC value Reference Oscillator 1411 4060 32 Selects the source of the reference frequency Internal External The internal reference signal of 10 MHz is used Remote control command SOUR ROSC SOUR INT An external reference signal is used The frequency of the external reference signal must be selected under External Reference Frequency Remote control command SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT Selects the frequency of the external reference signal Remote control command SOUR ROSC EXT FREQ 13E6 Source internal only Activates the adjustment mode OFF The calibrated adjustment value of the internal reference frequency is used This value is determined at one of the R amp S service shops during calibration Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT OFF
302. ommand activates deactivates the LF output Example LFO ON activates the LF output The settings under LFO FREQ and LFO SWE become effective SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 52 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWEL 2 ms 10s The command sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF Example LFO SWE DWEL 20 ms sets a dwell time of 20 ms SCPI Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute The command immediately starts an LF sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE SINGle The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example FO SWE MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the LF sweep FO SWE EXEC starts one cycle of the LF sweep SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 53 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep The assignment of the IEC IEEE bus commands to the sweep modes is given in the description of the sweep menus Parameters AUTO Each tr
303. ompanies make every effort to keep the safety standard of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde A Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits
304. on depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message is displayed Remote control command SOUR PM DEV 2 5 SOUR PM EXT DEV 2 5 Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD input in RAD V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under PhiM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Note The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 Vs otherwise modulation distortions might occur Remote control command SOUR PM SENS Source External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source AC The DC voltage content is separated from the modulation signal Remote control command SOUR PM EXT COUP AC DC The modulation signal is not altered Remote control command SOUR PM EXT COUP DC Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Pulse Modulation R amp S SMC100A Pulse Modulation An internal or external source can be selected for pulse modulation A pulse generator is av
305. on how to set up the signal generator for remote control operation e A general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments This includes the description of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard the description of command execution and of the status registers In chapter Remote Control Commands all remote control functions are described in detail The subsystems are listed by alphabetical order according to SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands instrument control commands are used for remote control The instrument is equipped with the following interfaces for remote control EC IEEE bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 2 LAN interface the network card uses 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u the protocol is based on the VXI 11 standard USB interface The type B interface device USB is used for remote control The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit a connection to a controller for remote control either via GPIB via a local area network LAN or via an USB interfaceUSB The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in Chapter Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN or USB interface VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instru
306. onfiguration and the signal flow in the generator with the aid of function blocks containing an ON OFFswitch Clicking the function block opens a list of associated setting menus Active menus and info windows are displayed on top of the block diagram The block diagram is displayed in the foreground by pressing the diagram button Diagram or by clicking on the DIAGR key in the key emulation dialog 1411 4077 62 1 2 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Legend for Front Panel View 3 Keys for setting frequency and level Se FREQ See chapter 3 section mee Activates frequency entry Setting Parameters and chapter 4 section LEVEL ren Activates level entr bl n Modulations INFO Displays status messages error messages and warnings BACK BACKSPACE Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Keypad for data entry Gin Keypad for data entry See chapter 3 section wa 0 9 Setting Parameters Entry of numeric values a Entry of decimal point Entry of sign ejeje ej 8 050 GO l abc Entry of letters Entry of a space sd Entry of special characters Aca Switchover between uppercase and lowercase letters 1411 4077 62 1 3 E 1 Legend for Front Panel View R amp S SMC100A 4 Keypad for data entry Keys for data entry See chapter 3 section Selecting a Unit The unit keys can either select a unit and thus Setting Parameters determine the absolute value or change the unit Their function depends on th
307. ord and IP address of the signal generator can access this R amp S SMC Even after cutting it the connection is still enabled and the R amp S SMC can be accessed any time To disable the connection the VNC program on the R amp S SMC must be uninstalled or the VNC server service disabled To enhance security also communication on the network via Ultr VNC program should be disabled in the firewall 1411 4077 62 1 20 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Remote Access via an External Controller Install VNC Viewer and Establish VNC Connection on the Windows PC The Ultr VNC program is available on the Internet as a free of charge download or on the R amp S SMC CD ROM Following the instructions on the Internet the program can be copied onto the external Windows PC Only the program component VNC Viewer is required Note The VNC Viewer program is included in the download for the installation of the Ultr VNC program on the signal generator if Full installation was selected in the Select Component panel In this case the program ultr vncviewer exe can be copied to the Windows PC 1 Install VNC Viewer program component on the PC 2 Start VNC Viewer program component on the PC lx Connection MA yc Server 192 168 1 1 gt ur host display or host port Quick Options AUTO Auto select best settings ES C ULTRA 2Mbit s Experimental Cancel C LAN gt 1Mbit s Max Colors Gei C MEDIUM gt 128Kbit s Max Co
308. ort name of option More Opens a dialog with additional information e g on designation license number and expiration date of option For regular options Permanent is indicated in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expiration date After this date the option is no longer available on the instrument Section Loaded Modules is provided for service purposes It lists all loaded software modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module 1411 4060 32 4 12 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Install SW Option Setup System Newly purchased software options are enabled in the Install SW Options menu They are ready to operate after they are enabled by means of a key code supplied with the option Option Ke Only if the R amp S SMC Signal Generator is equipped with an older firmware version a firmware update prior to enabling the software option may be required The information on the valid firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option The firmware update is described in the service manual instrument chapter 4 on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Self Test A self test is provided by the instruments firmware Several diagnostic points are checked to verify the correct values and functions of the instrument The Selftest dialog is called by using the SETUP key
309. oses the info window k m uV ALT F11 Selects the units Kilo Milli and uV for RF levels LEVEL CTRL L Activates the level entry LOCAL CTRL Q Switches the instrument from remote control to manual control M y uV ALT F10 Selects the units Mega Micro and pV for RF levels MOD ON OFF CTRL O s Switches modulation on off MOD OFF is indicated in the status line PRESET CTRL P Restores a defined basic instrument setup RF ON OFF CTRL R Switches the RF output signal on off RF OFF is indicated in the status line SETUP CTRL E Opens the setup menu for general instrument settings 1411 4077 62 3 26 E 1 RES SMC100A Legend of Front Panel Controls Front Panel Key Emulation The R amp S SMC provides a front panel key emulation to enable execution of the front panel key functions by mouse e g for remote access The emulation is called by a right mouse click The front panel key functions are executed by a mouse click on the associated button 1411 4077 62 3 27 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Contents Instrument Functions Contents Chapter 4 Instrument Functions 1411 4060 32 4 Instrument Functions EEN NEn 4 5 General Instrument Geittngs cono nannccnn nan nc eee 4 6 Overview of General Instrument Settings oooooonninninnnnnnnninnnccocinnannns 4 6 Default Instrument Settings Preset Key 4 6 General Configuration of Instrument Setup key 4 8 Internal Adjustm
310. pe of an applied instrument trigger Slope LF Sweep This setting affects the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG LF Output Menu The LF Output menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the SETUP key under Mod Gen i Mod Gen The LF Output menu provides access to the configuration of the internal modulation generators In addition the LF output is configured in this menu The available settings depend on the source selected and on the installed options In the upper section of the menu the LF output is switched on The configuration of the internal source is performed in the lower section of the LF Output menu or in the individual modulation menus of the Mod block e g Amplitude Modulation menu These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources and the LF output Output Voltage 1 000 v LFGen Frequency 4 000 00 kHz 1411 4060 32 4 98 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Pulse Generator Menu State LF Output Output Voltage LF Output LF Gen Freq LF Output Activates deactivates the LF Output The modulation signal is output at the LF output connector at the front of the instruments Remote con
311. produced at any time by loading this data If required these settings can be loaded to various signal generators The corresponding menu is available under Save Recall in the Setup menu The instrument settings are saved in files which can be stored in a data directories Additionally there are intermediate memories in which the current instrument settings can be stored and called up again by just pressing a key This provides fast switching between different instrument settings Only settings which differ from the preset values are stored As a result the files remain relatively small Furthermore instrument settings can easily be transferred between different equipped signal generators since the files contain only relevant information When loaded the referenced settings are implemented and all non referenced parameters are set to the associated preset values If list data is part of the instrument settings e g a list of user correction data a reference to this list is stored not the list itself The list is reactivated when the associated settings are loaded but the list may have been modified or deleted in the meantime or may not be available on a different instrument If the list has been modified the new entries will be used An error message appears if an attempt is made to access a non existing list or to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument Note Network settings and remote settings are not saved and resto
312. program and displayed in the menu as an option in case of an Ethernet link 1411 4060 32 5 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control Create New Cd Automation Explorer Ww You can specify an alas for this device An alias za logical name for the device that makes t eases to idenbly this nistiument You can use the abases in your code when calling viDpen to create a session to this device Resource Name TCPIP 127 00 T INSTR Alas su lt Back New Frish Cancel ly 7 Press Next and then the Finish button The instrument is now registered in the program and can be addressed via the resource or alias name Create New Measurement amp H Automation Explorer NW MAX is ready to create your device y Click Finish to create your device Click Back to review device information in the previous pages Click Cancel to leave this wizard without creating your device Finish Cancel Z Starting the Measurement amp Automation program for remote control of the Signal Generator 1 Start program on the controller 2 Inthe Configuration window open Instruments and Interfaces and select R amp S SM Alias under VISA Ethernet Devices 3 Open the menu by clicking Open VISA Session with the right mouse key 1411 4060 32 5 7 Si R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control PE o File Edit View Tools Help Greeep Zeen visa session Ill SM Show Hide VIS
313. puter name may be entered instead 1411 4060 32 5 5 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control Create New Measurement amp WW Automation Explorer S y Enter the TCP IP address of your VISA network resource in the form of xxx xxx xxx xx the name of the computer or a computer some domain 127 0 0 1 Choose the type of TCP IP resource you d like to create C Raw Socket Port Number g Val Instrument LAN Device Name Try connecting to this resource Back Nes Finish Cancel 5 Press the Test button A message indicates whether the link to the Signal Generator can be set up or not If a connection cannot be set up check whether the controller and the instrument are connected to the network network cable and switched on Correct spelling of the IP address or the computer name can also be checked For further error location inform the network administrator In large networks specification of additional addresses may be required for link setup e g gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network administrator MAX NE B Ku Successfully opened a VISA session to TCPIP 127 0 0 1 1NS TR MAX E P Ku Could not open a VISA session to TCPIP 127 0 0 1 INS TR 6 Press the Next button An alias name for the instrument can be entered in the next window This name must not be mistaken for the computer name It is only used for instrument identification within the
314. quency value with the rotary knob ON OFF The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user defined step width which is entered under Variation Step Remote control command SOUR FREQ STEP MODE USER The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one unit at the cursor position standard operating mode Remote control command SOUR FREQ STEP MODE DEC The phase of the RF output signal can be changed in the RF Phase menu Phase Menu The Phase menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF Ref Oscillator Level EMF User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep 1411 4060 32 NRP Z Power Viewer Automatic Level Control Ej 4 42 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Phase The phase of the output signal can be changed in the Phase Settings section upper part of the group menu Phase Settings Delta Phase 0 0 deg Reset Delta Phase Display The upper parts concern the frequency settings for the output signal and are described in the section RF Frequency page 4 40 Delta Phase RF Sets the phase of the RF signal The current phase of the signal is Phase used as the reference This function allows for example the phase of the output signal to be synchronized with the phase of a signal from a second signal generator Remote control command SOUR PHAS 10
315. queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems Commands RST DCL and SYSTem PRESet and switching on the supply voltage also affect the status reporting system None of the commands except for RST and SYSTem PRESet influences the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Resetting the Status Reporting System Event Switching on supply voltage DCL SDC PX Device Clear STATus PRESet CLS Power Da tls Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Clear Effect 0 Clear command processing and input buffer 1 Every command being the first in a command line i e immediately following a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer 1411 4060 32 5 28 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Contents Remote Control Commands Contents Chapter 6 Remote Control Commands 6 1411 4060 32 Remote Control COMMANGS ooooocccccccoonoonnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas 6 1 Command Description 6 1 Nozio PL 6 1 Common Commandes sss eene e
316. r 1411 4060 32 6 30 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the generated signals The keyword SOURce is optional and can be ommitted SOURce AM Subsystem The AM subsystem contains the commands for checking the amplitude modulation The AM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce AM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector The keyword SOURce is optional with commands and can be omitted SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC eee SOURce AM DEPTh 0 100 PCT The command sets the overall modulation depth of the amplitude modulation in percent Example AM 15PCT sets the AM modulation depth to 15 percent See data sheet Compliant SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input MOD EXT in the case of amplitude modulation Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example AM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 31 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce AM SENSitivity The command queries the input s
317. r 1411 4077 62 3 23 E 1 RES SMC100A File Management File Manager The File Manager allows general file management such as copying shifting renaming and deleting files as well as generating new directories The File Manager can be called up in any menu to which files can be saved Call up is either at the level of the small selection menu User Cor Data Select User Correction Data or via the File Manager button in the File Select window File Manager The File Manager can also be called up in the Save Recall Setup Settings menu In the upper area File Type the File Manager allows the type file selection to be displayed This can be used to process either all files all files selection or a specific selection of files e g user correction ucor selection The table at the end of this section contains a list of the file types The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed above the windows If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed Unlike the File Select window the File Manager displays the full file names including extensions The buttons trigger the associated actions such as copying shifting or deleting the marked files Plus a new directory can be created in the level below the marked directory Operation is similar to the operation of menus with
318. r In addition a front panel key emulation and an on screen keyboard can be used for manual operation by mouse only see below Front panel key Key of PC keyboard Function Tab key towards the right Shift Tab towards the left Sets the cursor with the rotary knob Enter Pressing the rotary knob confirms an entry it has the same function as the ENTER key Arrow keys Moves the cursor Enter dB m ALT F12 Confirms entries in the base unit and values without a unit Selects dBm for the RF level and dB for level offset and level step width D echt NL Enters a period decimal point Enters a special character Aa shift a z Enters the sign Switches between upper case and lower case letters 0 9 a z CTRL 0 9 a z CTRL Enters the number letter BACKSPACE Backspace Clears the last entry number sign or decimal point CLOSE CTRL G Closes an active menu DIAGR CTRL D Sets the cursor on the block diagram and hides all menus ENTER Enter Terminates an entry ESC ESC Selects the next higher menu selection level When the editing mode is exited with ESC the previous value is restored FREQ CTRL F Activates the frequency entry G n dBuV ALT F9 Selects the unit Giga Nano dBuV for the RF level and dBu for the LF level HELP F1 Opens closes context sensitive help INFO CTRL I Opens cl
319. r 100023 1411 4060 32 6 9 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A DIAGnostic BGINfo CATalog The command queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument A complete list of all assemblies is returned the various entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration Example DIAG BGIN CAT queries the names of the assemblies Response BABO RFBO Device specific DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command queries the number of operation hours Example DIAG INFO OTIM queries the operation hours Response 100023 the instrument was operated for 100023 hours up to now Device specific DIAGnostic INFO POCount The command queries the number of power on events Example DIAG INFO POC queries the number of power on events Response 123 the instrument was switched on for 123 times up to now Device specific DIAGnostic POINt CATalog The command queries the test points available in the instrument A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Example DIAG POIN CAT queries the test points available in the instrument Response DIAG SMC BAB P7V DIAG SMC BAB P5V DIAG SMC BAB P3V3 Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description DIAGnostic MEASure POINt
320. r DC coupling for external feed is possible Available internal and external analog modulation modes are e Amplitude modulation AM e Frequency modulation FM e Phase modulation PhiM e Pulse modulation PULSE Note An activated frequency modulation disables phase modulation and vice versa For modulation modes that can be simultaneously used refer to the R amp S SMC data sheet The status line in the block displays the active modulation s RF block TRIG e Iv The RF parameters and frequency level sweep settings are set in the RF block An active sweep is displayed in the statusline of the block The RF ON OFF key switches the RF signal on and off When the RF signal is switched off the switch before the RF output symbol is open The RF 50 Q output connector on the front of the instrument provides the output of the RF signal An external trigger gate signal for sweeps is input via the INSTR TRIG connector on the rear of the instrument RF settings include Frequency and reference frequency Level settings if required Frequency and level sweep Hint Set the frequency or level values directly in the entry fields of the status bar either by pressing the FREQ or LEVEL buttons on the front panel of the instrument or by clicking on the Frequency or Level keys in the key emulation dialog Alternatively the values are set in the dialogs RF Frequency Phase or RF Level EMF
321. r polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Device specific refer to functions depending on the features of the Commands instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee Device specific extensions following the SCPI rules are permitted by the standard Device are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can responses contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the Response instrument status cf Section Responses to Queries Messages and Service Request Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following Section 1411 4060 32 5 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI Command Structure and Syntax The commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and parameter are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header Note The commands used in the following examp
322. rameter SOUR BB MCCW SEQ AUTO SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Out of memory 225 The storage space available in the instrument is exhausted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Parameter not allowed 108 The command contains too many parameters Example Command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency permits only one frequency indication PREQ CENT 30 kHz 40 kHz SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Program mnemonic too long 112 The header contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Queue overflow 350 This error code is entered into the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full It indicates that an error has occurred but not been recorded in the queue The original error message is lost Remedy Reading out the error messages e g with command SYSTem ERRor ALL clears the error queue SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Query interrupted 410 This query has been interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Query unterminated 420 This query is missing or incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a t
323. rating Modes sasssssssissesssrissnnnesrnassiennssnnaadsinnnentnnnniennni 4 81 Amplitude Modulation AM 4 81 Amplitude Modulation Menu 4 81 Frequency Modulation FM mariinien ar EEr Aer EAR a iE 4 83 Frequency Modulation Menu sese 4 83 Phase Modulation Dh 4 86 Phase Modulation Men 4 86 Pulse Mod latioriz eiii eet e tuat e eu tl 4 88 Pulse Modulation Menu 4 88 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block 4 92 LF Frequency Sweep Men 4 92 LF Output Melina Pt rn eR Se Tie TR ace 4 98 Pulse Generator Menu cccccceeeecececeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeceaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeineeeeeeess 4 99 IV 2 E 4 R amp S SMC100A Instrument Functions 4 Instrument Functions This chapter explains the functions of the signal generator and the options available in the setting menus The associated IEC IEEE bus command is specified for each parameter where applicable The description begins with the general instrument settings which do not directly affect signal generation The majority of these settings can be accessed by means of front panel key menus and not by means of function block menus The signal generation functions are then described beginning with the functions which affect the RF signal RF block and the analog modulations Mod block The configuration of the modulation generators LF generators and pulse generator and of the LF sweep is offered in the Mod Gen block The general instrument s
324. ration and the signal flow in the form of a block diagram is the core of the operating concept of the R amp S SMC Signal Generator The block diagram gives an overview of signal configuration and the graphical elements can be accessed for operation The desired element is selected by means of the rotary knob and the associated setting function is called by clicking this button Required menus are displayed on the block diagram which is displayed again in the foreground whenever the DIAGR key is pressed Permanent display of frequency and level of the RF output signal The main characteristics of the RF signal frequency and level are permanently displayed in the header section of the screen and can be directly set in the display fields after the FREQ or LEVEL key is pressed Status messages for the output signal are displayed in addition to frequency and level Freq Level 100 000 000 00 mz 30 00 86m 1411 4077 62 3 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Operating Concept Operation via the graphics interface Menus are assigned to the specific function blocks in the block diagram The function blocks represent elements of signal generation e g the Modulation block which contains all menus required for modulation signal configuration In this block all modulations can be selected Function blocks displayed with a blue frame can be directly switched on and off by means of the MOD ON OFF key In the exampl
325. rco 8 1 Hardware Interfaces eene 8 2 IEC IEEE Bus Interface 8 2 Rn Be nu TE 8 5 USB Connection USB and USPBINI see 8 8 1411 4060 32 VIII 1 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the signal generator and a description of the remote control interfaces Please follow the instructions in the service manual when exchanging modules or ordering spares The order no for spare parts can be found in the service manual The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde amp Schwarz service centers can be found at the beginning of the printed manual The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting repair and exchange of modules Maintenance The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument NOTICE Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Prior to cleaning disconnect the product from the AC supply Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents su
326. rd product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories 1171 0000 42 04 00 Sheet 1 Grouped Safety Messages Tags and their meaning DANGER DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury WARNING WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE NOTICE indicates a property damage message In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications lt is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and thus contribute to personal injury or material damage Basic safety instructions Rohde 8 Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be 1 The product
327. re nennen nnns 6 109 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress sse 6 109 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE sisse eene nnns 6 111 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdressS SET eese 6 111 SV femzCOMkMuntcate NET aiork MAC address 6 112 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESOUrCe essseseee eene enhn nr 6 112 SV femzCOMkMuntcate USD RE Goumei sesenta aiani nnne nnns 6 112 SS NN 6 113 SYS Tem RI E RE 6 113 SYSTem ERROIT NEXTI 2 2 dieti at diia 6 115 SYSTEMERROGALE EE 6 113 SYSIem ERROCGODE NEXT I 3 iio gen ino adn alain Eas 6 115 1411 4060 32 10 7 E 1 Alphabetical List of Commands R amp S SMC100A S SYSTem ERRO ee TEE 6 115 CEET 6 113 SYSTemM KLOCK EE 6 116 SYS Tem LAN Guage cC 6 116 SYSTEM PRES ei el IES EE eins 6 116 SYSTem PROTect ns E STA Te h iic bd dr the ai dd dt ia 6 117 SYSIOnSERROL b isi Bneit ime eise t sett cete i tec ER dpi 6 117 SYSTem STARt p COMPIl te sess eite nein nn 6 117 SY STROM IME it AS A aaa 6 118 e ME OD EELER EE o b dal aes 6 118 T TEST DIR6CE ue a Re d pu he er e e eed bee ir eva abe E Fea rue ee oua 6 119 TRIGger SWEepj IMMediate sss sees nennen nnns 6 123 TRIGger FSWeep IMMediate sessanta sensns nna 6 121 TRIGO FS Weep SOURCE x d E dei bt us 6 121 TRIGger LEFSWeep SOQURce i ad req ae dav Fer eor e eeu Lg e Leu Ea pe 6 120 TRIGger PSWeep IMMediate esses esee eene n
328. re nnd 6 99 UNIT SUbSySstelm in eite tie er tet RR RR UR MR cepe tovt ines 6 104 VI 1 E 3 R amp S SMC100A Command Description 6 Remote Control Commands In the following all remote control commands for the R amp S SMC will be presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values An introduction to remote control and the status registers of the R amp S SMC is given in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics Command Description Notation All commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail arranged alphabetically according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands Table of Commands Command In the command column the table provides an overview of the commands Parameter The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with their specified range Unit The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters Remark In the remark column an indication is made on whether the command does not have a query form whether the command has only one query form Individual description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options that are required to execute the command are listed In
329. re stacked instruments against slipping e g by locking the feet to the top of the front panel frame The feet must be fully folded in or folded out Only then a stable position of the instrument and reliable operation can be ensured The uniform pressure on the folded out feet must not exceed 500 N weight of instrument and of equipment stacked on top When using the instrument with expanded feet the feet might collapse and fold in Do not shift the instrument with the feet out RES SMC100A Putting into Operation Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument NOTICE Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Prior to cleaning disconnect the product from the AC supply Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents such as solvents e g diluent for lacquers thinners acetone alcohol etc or acids bases or other substances Use a soft non linting cloth to suitably clean the outside of the instrument EMC Safety Precautions To avoid EMI Electro Magnetic Interference double shielded signal and control cables must be used at all signal connectors Outputs and lines have to be terminated properly with 50 Ohms USB devices must keep within permissible EMI limits Connecting the R amp S SMC to the AC Supply The R amp S SMC is automat
330. red Lists are stored and loaded in the appropriate menus For example the user correction data list is created and stored in the User Correction menu When loading an instrument setting it is possible to select whether the current frequency and level setting is to be retained or whether the stored settings are to be activated It is possible to delete stored instrument settings General file management functions such as copying and moving data are available in the File Manager submenu 1411 4060 32 4 33 E 4 Storing and Loading Instrument Data R amp S SMC100A File Menu The settings available in the File menu depend on the operation selected under Select Operation Select Operation Save Y Select Operation Selects the file function Save Calls the menu for storing the current instrument setting Recall Calls the menu for calling up a stored instrument setting Storing Instrument Settings File If Save is selected under Select Operation the File menu provides options for storing the current instrument setting in a file Select Operation Save Y recent data sets File Name d Save Save File Imm 1 Imm 2 Manager Recent data sets File Displays the files last used The entire path is shown in plain text Remote control command n a 1411 4060 32 4 34 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Directory File File List File File Name File Save File Save Immediate x File Management 1411 4060
331. reduces the problems involved with Remote control MAV bit Message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit Master Status Summary Bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is Set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE By analogy with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll cf Section Parallel Poll or using the command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using command PRE 1411 4060 32 5 25 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Status Reporting System Eve
332. register Invalid separator 103 The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator Example A semicolon is missing after the first command in a command line with several commands FREQ 2MHz POW 25 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid suffix 131 The suffix is not appropriate for this command Example nHz is not defined SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1411 4060 32 9 7 E 1 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMC100A Lists not same length 226 The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via IEC bus All parts of the list have to be transmitted always before it is executed Example The POWer list content is longer than the FREQuency list content or only the POWer content is transmitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Missing parameter 109 No error 0 The command does not contain the required parameters Example Command SOUR FREQ requires the indication of a parameter FREQ POW 35 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register This message is output if the error queue does not contain entries Numeric data not allowed 128 The command contains a numeric data element the device does not accept in this position Example The command SOUR BB MCCW SEQ requires the indication of a text pa
333. rence frequency and the output REF OUT serves as the output of the reference frequency internal or external RF Frequency The easiest way to set the RF frequency is to enter it directly in the header of the display me e 7 7 000 000 000 00 sz The entry is activated by pressing the FREQ key Changes to the frequency have an immediate effect without confirmation with the Enter key on the output signal Remote control command SOUR FREQ 100 MHz Note The IEC IEEE bus command sets the level of the Freq display i e an entered frequency offset is taken into consideration in the frequency value see below The frequency entered and displayed in the frequency entry field takes any set frequency offset into consideration e g an offset set for a downstream instrument This means that with a frequency offset the frequency displayed in the header does not correspond to the frequency at the RF output but rather to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument A set frequency offset is indicated by the FREQ OFFSET status message This allows the desired frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered in the frequency field The R amp S SMC Signal Generator changes the RF output frequency according to the entered offset However the frequency entered and displayed in the Frequency menu of the RF function block always corresponds to the RF output frequency Any frequency offset is no
334. requency does not yet reach its final value either Error Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Volatile messages Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Remote control command SYST ERR or SYST ERR ALL Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history Remote contr
335. rsal commands e addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages If an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The IEC IEEE bus interface commands are emulated see EC IEEE Bus Messages 1411 4060 32 5 9 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Interface and Device Messages Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII character set is used If an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The device messages are equal for the different interfaces IEC IEEE bus and Ethernet A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device Program functions and request information Messages The commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC IEEE bus e g for identification of the device o
336. ry COPY lt source gt lt destination gt This command copies the first specified file to the second specified file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files If destination is not specified source is copied to the MMEM CDIR directory Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory COPY file source msus source file destination msus destination The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM COPY var rs gen testl savrcl var temp copies the file test1 savrcl in the USER directory on the internal flash memory to the TEMP directory without changing the file name SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 16 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt lt binary block data gt MMEMory DATA file name This command writes the block data binary block data to the file identified by file name The IEC IEEE bus terminator should be set to EOI in order to ensure correct data transfer The associated query command transfers the specified file from the R amp S Signal Generator to the IEC IEEE bus and then on to the control computer It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the contro
337. ry knob front panel or the config button mouse opens the associated setting menu Modulation Amplitude Mod Pulse Mod Signal Flow and Input Output Symbols in the Block Diagram The input output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used inputs and outputs of the signal generator Unused inputs and outputs are not shown The lines indicate the signal flow Symbols and labels refer to the corresponding inputs and outputs on the front and rear panel of the signal generator The direction input or output is indicated by an arrow Example ra The symbols indicate the input for the external pulse signal on the instrument rear panel PULSE EXT 1411 4077 62 3 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display Menu Structure Display The parameters are set in the menus Menus are called either via the function blocks in the diagram or by means of the setup menu key The menus are displayed on top of the block diagram If the menu buttons assign menu specific functions to the softkeys the Winbar is hidden FM Deviation 1 000 00 kHz D FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz D This section describes the menu structure Menu operation is described in section Menu Operation page 3 18 the setting of parameters in section Setting Parameters page 3 11 The menus are in Windows format They differ in details depending on their function but they consist of the same main elements Frequency Modulation
338. s Getting Started Contents Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Getting Started iia 2 1 Introduction Getting Started ssssssssssee eene 2 1 Description of Individual Diagram Block see 2 2 Available BOCK Sis sii rhe eer de e REA 2 2 Info and Help System ooooonncccccnnoccccnoconccconnnncncnnnnnnncnannnnnnnannncnnnnannccnnnns 24 Example Ot Setup c tette leit ett itu det i salt lal etd 2 4 Generation of an Amplitude Modulated Signal 2 5 Generation of an RF Frequency Sweep Signal 2 9 1411 4077 62 Il 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Getting Started 2 Getting Started Introduction Getting Started The Signal Generator R amp S SMC is suitable for applications which require sine wave signals with high spectral purity i e signals with high quality The internal LF generator is used as a modulation source and permits generation of analog modulated signals A signal can be amplitude AM frequency FM phase PhiM or pulse PM modulated With its adjustable frequency range from 9 kHz up to 3 2 GHz the generator is especially designed for medium scale RF generation Various fields of applications are covered e g in lab service production and quality assurance The main applications are generating modulated signals to check the data taken by a receiver functionality testing of components in production generation of modulated signals
339. s 4 98 6 81 aC xe td Re 6 81 State Pulse Generator 4 97 6 83 With epe 4 98 6 81 Driver initialization failed 204 9 19 Dwell Time Level SWeeD ninm Dudes 4 86 6 95 EF Sweep is 4 106 6 62 RF SW66D iieri us 4 80 6 90 E Edit User Correction Data 4 66 EFC Electronic Frequency Control 4 48 EFC mode Electronic Frequency Control 4 48 EMF Level display ssssessss 4 61 Enable disable been 6 105 Enter Key eie 1 4 Entry fleld i e hens 3 10 EOI command line susss 5 14 Error messages 3 7 9 4 9 5 Error messages display list 6 117 Error QUEUE nata deidades 5 29 E 1 Index Error queue query 6 102 6 113 6 115 ESE event status enable register 5 27 Ethernet ht 1 21 Ethernet Remote Control 5 4 Event status enable register ESE 5 27 Example for seiting 2 6 2 10 Exclude Frequency 4 29 4 38 6 53 Exclude Level 4 30 4 39 6 75 Execute Single Sweep Frequency ween 4 78 6 90 Level ween 4 84 6 96 LE SWOOD tii nii aAA 4 104 6 62 Expiration date of option 4 13 LS eier 5 16 Exponent too large 72721 9 7 EXT REP a d eds 9 2 Extension Import Export User Correction data 4 70 6 44 External reference out of range or disconnected 50
340. s all test points DIAG1 POIN DIAG SMC BAB PV With remote control voltage measurement starts as soon as the test point is selected Voltage Test Point Displays the measured voltage measurement at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG1 MEAS POIN DIAG SMC DAD P7V Response 2 1411 4060 32 4 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Check Front Panel Setup Test The Check Front Panel menu is used to check whether the front panel keys are working correctly The menu displays all the front panel keys arranged in the same way as on the front panel The respective function is executed by pressing the associated key Presa Frew rep teva ESCH Roll click Date and Time Setup Environment The Date Time menu provides access to the system time and date settings It is opened using the SETUP key under Environment The time is used on the internal controller Date DD MM YYYY 08 07 2008 Time hh mm ss 12 21 38 Date Enters the date in the format day month year Remote control command SYST DATE 2007 03 20 Time Enters the time in the format hour minute second Remote control command SYST TIME 23 59 59 1411 4060 32 4 15 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Network Settings Setup Environment The Network Settings menu provides access to the network settings It is opened using the SETUP key under Environment The R amp
341. s assigned manually SYST COMM NETW DNS ALT 7 8 9 10 sets the IP address of the alternate DNS server SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates the above settings SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 89 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS MODE STATic AUTO The command selects if the DNS server address is assigned automatically or manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET Parameters AUTO The DNS server address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function STATic The DNS server address is assigned manually Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE AUTO the DNS server address is assigned automatically DHCP SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates DHCP SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS PREFerred 0 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF The command sets the preferred DNS server address manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT the DNS server address is assigned manually SYST COMM NETW DNS PREF 7 8 9 10 sets the IP address of the preferred DNS server SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates the above settings SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS SET The comman
342. s io nno netiis 5 12 not allowed 138 sss 9 15 TOnga OT 9 15 Sweep Center freguench 4 78 6 51 LF start frequency suss 4 104 6 61 LF stop freguenck 4 104 6 61 RF ZSween 4 75 6 54 6 78 6 91 Stat EE 4 85 6 78 Stop Level 4 85 6 79 UA 4 78 4 84 4 104 6 123 Sweep Shape LF SWeeps da 4 105 6 64 RF Level Suween 4 85 6 97 F MMEN Ende 4 79 6 92 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep spacing Level ZGween 4 86 6 97 RESWOOD EE 4 79 6 94 Syntax error 102 sss 9 15 System directory sss 3 23 6 16 error FITO iii 9 15 Settings Setup sss 4 18 T TCPIP Visa Resource String 4 22 Terminator recognition ss 6 105 Test point voltage display 4 15 6 13 Text Darameierg nennen annene 5 17 This modulation forces other modulations off 140 9 20 Time Setup 4 16 6 118 Too many digits 124 sesssssss 9 15 Too much data 223 sss 9 15 Trigger input 1 10 2 4 Trigger Mode Pulse Modulation 4 99 6 85 Trigger Source Level ween 4 82 6 122 LF Zween 4 101 6 120 RF Sweep sprece erni arnt niini 4 75 6 121 Triggering sweep manually 4 84 6 90 6 96 Type Power Sensors 4 51 6 34 6 35 U AA eran ea Ae 9 4 er 1 24 Undefined header 113 9 16 Uninterrupted lev
343. s nea BER EE 6 99 STATus OPERation NTRansition eese esee ener hh ETEei ii i etna arsit earns enar nnns 6 100 STATus OPERation PTRansitlon 1 x compu OB He HER 6 100 STATUS PRE kat aH p ee ett estes e C e greet elas 6 101 STATus QUEStionable CONDition esses eene enne nennen nnne nnn nnne nante nnns 6 101 STAT s QUEStionable ENABle 5 mins aii es 6 102 STATus QUEStionable EVENI A HERO RM E ERU Ha Oe ams 6 101 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition esses essen enne nennen three nnne nnn nnns 6 102 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition reret reo aet e aT E sesenta nnne rennen nns 6 101 STATUS QUEUE NEXT EE 6 102 SS UN 6 105 Sv fem COMMuntcate GPDIGt SEL ET AfDtDtdess esee ethernet nannten 6 105 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator eese seien eher nnne 6 105 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMonJ HOS Tnuame eese 6 106 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GA Teway essen 6 109 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK sse 6 111 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon SET esses eee 6 106 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS AL Temate esses eene nnns 6 106 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS MODE eese enne tenent nnne annees 6 108 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS PREFerred sese seen enn 6 108 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS SET sss eene 6 108 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork GET sse essen enean nena r
344. s not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after each frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Search Once ALC Manually activates level control briefly to allow the level to be calibrated the Sample amp Hold setting must be selected Remote control command SOUR POW ALC SONC 1411 4060 32 4 58 E 1 R amp S SMC100A User Correction User Correction The User Correction function is used to create and activate lists in which level correction values predefined by the user are freely assigned to RF frequencies Correction is performed by the user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values The lists are created in the List Editor Each list is stored in its own file with the predefined file extension uco The name of the User Correction file can be freely selected The files are loaded from the Lists file manager Externally created tables with pairs of frequency and level values can be converted into User Correction files using the import function The external files must have the file extension txt or csv These file formats are provided e g by the Microsoft Excel program The separators for tabl
345. s selected the pulse generator is switched on automatically and the video sync signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO output at the rear of the instrument Signal output can be switched off in the Pulse Generator menu of the Mod Gen block Remote control command SOUR PULM STAT ON 1411 4060 32 4 88 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Pulse Modulation Source Pulse Selects the source for the pulse modulation signal Modulation Pulse Selects the internal pulse generator Generator The internally generated rectangular signal is used for the pulse modulation Remote control command SOUR PULM SOUR INT External Selects the external source The external modulation signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM SOUR EXT In case of modulation source pulse generator the settings for the pulse characteristics and the trigger are offered in the Pulse Generator section of the Pulse Modulation menu Generation of double pulse or selection of trigger mode is offered The output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO output is automatically switched on when activating pulse modulation It can be switched off in the Pulse Generator menu of the Mod Gen block Pulse Generator y Pulse Generator Pulse Mode Double Pulse Period 1 000 000 ms Pulse Width 0 500 000 ms y Double Pulse Width 0 200 000 ms y Double Pulse Delay 0 700 000 ms y Input Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Ext Triggered y
346. s the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enters the security password that is required to enable or disabled the LAN or USB interface Default is 123456 All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a 4 23 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A Save Recall Setup Setting The Signal Generator allows complete instrument settings to be stored in files either on the internal flash memory or on external USB memory devices Defined and complex instrument settings can then be reproduced at any time by loading this data If required these settings can be loaded to various signal generators The Save Recall menu in the Setup Settings menu is used to store and load instrument settings in a file Additionally there are three intermediate memories in which the current instrument setting can be stored and then called up again by just pressing a key This makes it possible to switch quickly between defined instrument settings All settings which differ from the preset plus the configuration data for the operating elements e g window positions are stored When loaded these referenced settings are implemented and all non referenced parameters are set to the associated preset value As a result the files remain relatively small since they only contain the relevant information Furthermore this also al
347. s the settling time to 5 seconds Device specific SENSe POWer FILTer SONCe The command activates the search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions The found filter length can be retrieved with command SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth USER This command is only available for user filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE USER The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SENS FILT TYPE USER selects user filter mode SENS FILT SONC activates the search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions SENS FILT LENG returns the found optimum filter length Response 128 1411 4060 32 6 26 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SENSe POWer FILTer I TYPE AUTO USER NSRatio The command selects the filter mode The filter length is the multiplier for the time window and thus directly influences the measurement time Parameters AUTO The filter length is automatically selected and adapted to the currently measured value With very high signals the filter length and therefore the measurement time can be short With very low signal levels the filter length and therefore the measurement time is increased in order to reduce noise The used filter length is quereid with command SENSe FILTer LENGth AUTO USER The filter length is set manually with command SENSe FILTer
348. s to the desired element e Clicking the rotary knob activates the selected entry field Depending on the parameter the submenu is now called the numeric value varied the list entry selected or the check box activated or deactivated e Ifa value is entered the entry is stored by another click on the rotary knob and the editing mode is exited Clear settings with the aid of independent submenus A separate menu is opened for each menu and submenu The menus can be operated independently of each other i e none of the menus requires that settings in other menus be completed before it can be closed This ensures flexible operation at all times The Winbar gives an overview of menus and simplifies their access The menus are displayed on top of the block diagram but they can be hidden using the DIAGR key They can be displayed again in full size toggle functionality of the DIAGR key The keys are assigned simple functions Most keys on the front panel of the R amp S SMC directly perform a simple function Since a great number of settings can thus be made by a keystroke operation is easy For instance the CLOSE key closes the active menu with the RF ON OFF key the RF output signal can be switched on or off An exception are keys that call a menu such as the SETUP key which opens the menu for general instrument settings Help functions support the user Numero
349. se to the start of the second pulse Example PULM DOUB DEL 22 us 22 us elapse between the beginning of the first pulse and the beginning of the second pulse in double pulse mode Device specific SOURce PULM DOUBle STATe ON OFF The command enables disables double pulse generation The two pulses are generated in one pulse period Example PULM DOUB STAT ON double pulse mode is enabled Device specific SOURce PULM DOUBle WIDTh 20ns 1s The command sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation Example PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the second pulse Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 68 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce PULM MODE DOUBle SINGle The command selects the mode for pulse generation Parameters SINGle Asingle pulse is generated in one pulse period DOUBle Two pulses are generated in one pulse period Example PULM MODE DOUB double pulse mode is enabled SINGle Device specific SOURce PULM PERiod 5ps 85 s 100ns 85 s The command sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Example PULM PER 220 us the pulse period is 220 us 1us 20 ns Device specific SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted The command sets the polarity between modulating and modulated signal This command is only effective for an external modulation signal Param
350. sed in the block diagram by way of the MOD function block or by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the SETUP key The MOD ON OFF key switches the active modulations on and off Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the header next to the Level field Remote control command SOUR MOD ALL STAT OFF Mod Gen Modulation RF config config config On On On The activated and deactivated state is indicated in the block diagram by means of the different block color and the status of the On checkbox The active modulations are indicated in the block Modulation Sources For amplitude pulse frequency and phase modulation the internal and external modulation source can be used Internal Modulation Sources A LF generator and a pulse generator are available as internal modulation sources The LF generator supplies sinusoidal signals see also the section LF Output Menu page 4 98 The pulse generator provides single and double pulse modulation with selectable pulse widths and periods External Modulation Sources The modulation inputs MOD EXT and PULSE EXT at the rear of the instrument are provided as the external modulation source for amplitude pulse frequency and phase modulation The external modulation signal at the inputs must have a voltage of V 1 V Veg 0 707
351. set to AUTO SOURce SWEep FREQ MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on Example TRIG FSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector SINGle Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 101 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A TRIGger PSWeep IMMediate The command immediately starts an RF level sweep The command is only effective for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO in combination with TRIG PSW SOUR SING The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example SWE POW MODE AUTO selects the triggered sweep mode i e a trigger is required to start the sweep TRIG PSW SOUR AUTO sets the Single trigger mode i e a trigger starts a single sweep TRIG PSW starts a single RF level sweep Device specific TRIGger PSWeep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle EXTernal BUS EAUTo The command sets the trigger source for the RF level sweep The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings un
352. several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters page 3 13 By using the rotary knob or cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by clicking the rotary knob or using the Enter key The rotary knob and up down cursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys it is possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory will only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the Esc key again shifts the entry focus up one level The buttons softkeys can be selected and activated e Shift file Mark file and then press the Cut button softkey Mark the directory to which the file is to be shifted and then click the Paste button softkey If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file e Copy file Mark file and then press the Copy button softkey Mark the directory to which the file is to be copied and then click the Paste button softkey If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file e Rename file Mark file and then press the Rename button softkey An entry window for entering the new file name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key If a file with
353. shock for the user or damage to the product which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product was moved from a cold to a warm environment Do not close any slots or openings on the product since they are necessary for ventilation and prevent the product from overheating Do not place the product on soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a closed housing unless this is well ventilated Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The temperature of the environment must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the data sheet Batteries and storage batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries and storage batteries away from children Do not short circuit batteries and storage batteries If batteries or storage batteries are improperly replaced this can cause an explosion warning lithium cells Replace the battery or storage battery only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see spare parts list Batteries and storage batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Batteries and storage batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the 1171 0000 42 04 00 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Please be
354. sible to assign a fixed IP address to the instrument 1411 4060 32 5 4 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control Setting up Control of the Signal Generator in the Measurement amp Automation Control Program 1 Start program on the controller 2 Open the Create new menu with the right mouse key 101 xi File Edit View Tools Help Configuration Devices and Interfaces Devices and Interfaces 3 GPIBO PCI GPIB Y Ports Serial amp Parallel 3 6 Software What is Devices and Interfaces CVI Run Time geg ement amp Automation The Devices and Interfaces category lists installed and detected DAQ py GPIB IMAG IVI Motion VISA and xl hardware Y NI 488 2 Software NI PAL Software o El NI VISA If you do not see your devices Your device may not be Windows Plug and Play compatible View the configuration help file for your device from the Help Help Topics menu or the instructions below for additional sl 3 Select TCP IP Resource and open the next page of the Create new menu with the right mouse key Measurement amp lt A Automation Explorer NW G3 Devices and Interfaces y GPIB VXI Interface 4 Serial Interface TCP IP Resource GPIB Interface y lt Back Next gt US Cancel IL 4 Enter the IP address of the Signal Generator and select VXI 11 Instrument the com
355. specific 1411 4060 32 6 39 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce CORRection DEXChange SELect lt list_name gt The command selects the user correction list to be imported or exported The user correction files are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var rs gen ucor import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor imp Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET SELect lt table name gt The command selects the table for user correction Level correction must also be activated with the command SOURce lt 1 2 gt CORRection CSET STATe ON The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR CSET SEL in which case the files in th
356. splay Info Status Information and Messages Display The status information and messages are displayed in the header section of the screen The messages differ with respect to their importance errors warnings info and the time of their appearance brief and permanent messages They require different treatment by the user Further information on all messages can be called in the info window see section nfo Window Display page 3 6 Chapter 9 Error Messages includes an overview of all status information and messages as well as instructions for error elimination Status Information The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the R amp S SMC The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user Status information is displayed between the frequency and level fields at the left of the info line or in the info line itself Freq RF OFF Level 1 000 000 000 0 c z 30 00 dv J ALC Auto Info 1411 4077 62 3 5 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Volatile m
357. spond to the level at the RF output but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered The R amp S SMC Signal Generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset However the level entered and displayed in the Level menu of the RF function block always corresponds to the RF output level Any level offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Level in header RF output level Level in menu Level offset Level offset by the instrument Offset in the Level menu Y Level at the output pe Attenuation W of the instrument gem Lev in the header RF output level area of the screen Amplitude in the Level menu The level offset is entered in the Level menu Here it is also possible to set the level without taking the offset into consideration and to make other settings such as level offset attenuator mode power on state The RF output is protected against overloading by an external signal applied to the RF output see section Overvoltage Protection 1411 4060 32 4 52 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Level Level Menu The Level menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep
358. ssible in the Factory Preset Setup Settings menu of the menu When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched off An exeption is the state of the RF output The state of the RF output power on state can be set to be always off in the EMF menu of the RF block User defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the File menu The following table gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings The other presets can be found in the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands chapter Remote Control Commands Description The list below the table shows the settings that are not affected by the PRESET key RF frequency 1 GHz RF level OFF Offsets 0 Modulations switched off Uninterrupted level setting switched off level attenuator mode AUTO Internal level control Level ALC AUTO User correction Level Ucor OFF LF output switched off Sweep switched off Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator menu Power on settings Level EMF menu Network settings Setup menu EC IEEE bus address Setup menu IDN identification Setup menu Password and settings protected by passwords Setup menu Start Stop Gui Update Setup menu Display and keyboard settings Setup menu 1411 4077 62
359. state PRE Freq Tem Li 1 000 000 000 0 sz 30 00 dem IT ALCAuo Info Set a defined instrument state by pressing the PRESET key Select the RF block by turning the rotary knob Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the NRP Z Power Viewer RF frequency sweep menu item can be selected Level EMF Automatic Level Control 1411 4077 62 2 9 E 1 Example of Setup R amp S SMC100A 4 Select RF Freq Sweep by turning the rotary knob Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control User Correction Press the rotary knob to open the RF Freq Sweep menu All sweep parameters are default except for the sweep mode The default settings are not changed RF Frequency Sweep State Auto D 100 000 000 000 MHz Stop Freq 500 000 000 000 MHz Center Freq 300 000 000 000 MHz y Span 400 000 000 000 MHz sl sl Start Freq Select the Mode parameter by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob and select setting Single from the list by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob now the sweep mode is set to single sweep from start to stop frequency RF Frequency Sweep Start Freq Stop Freq Extern Step Extern Start Stop 400 000 000 000 MHz ls Center Freq Span 4 Swit
360. stick The var directory can be used to save user defined data any subdirectory structure can be created on var Some default subdirectories are predefined but can be changed at any time The opt directory is a protected and therefore unaccessable system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss To prevent inadvertent deletion or overwriting of system files this directory is not specified in the file menus Files can be exchanged via a memory stick The memory stick has to be connected to the USB interface and accessed via the File menu The files are accessed in a File Select window in the individual menus Depending on the data type a file can either be selected or it can be selected and saved e Instrument settings can be saved and loaded In case of saving the current setting is saved to the specified file e Lists e g user correction lists can be loaded They can be generated either externally or internally For internal generation a new list must be created in the File Select window which will then be edited in the list editor of the individual menu User Cor Data The files are differentiated according to their extensions each type of file is assigned a specific file content The extension is usually of no consequence to the user since access to the files occurs in
361. sweep runs from start to stop frequency Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency i e the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth Remote control command SOUR SWE FREO SHAP SAWT One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back i e the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ SHAP TRI Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes Step Lin or Step Log is displayed depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step Lin Step Log With the linear sweep the step width is a fixed frequency value which is added to the current frequency The linear step width is entered in Hz Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1 MHz With the logarithmic sweep the step width is a constant fraction of the current frequency This fraction is added to the current frequency The logarithmic step width is entered in Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LOG 1 PCT 4 72 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode Dwell Time RF Sets the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the Frequency Sweep individual sweep steps Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ DWEL
362. t 6 40 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA SENSor POWer SONCe enne 6 41 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQUENCY sss sese enne nnns 6 40 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts ssssssssssss een 6 40 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POVWer esses seis esent entente nennen 6 41 L OUlbceVObtecton CG SET DATA POlWer DOINts een enne nennen 6 41 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete sss sisse innen nnne tht enne senes 6 43 SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe CA Talog sse 6 43 L OiUlb ceCObb echon D NvChangoeAtletviension essen 6 44 L OiUlb ceCObb echon DNvChangoeAtleSElect nn cn nnnnrn anar 6 44 SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn sse 6 45 SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal eene 6 45 SOURce CORRection DEX Change EXE Cute essere enne ann 6 46 SOURce CORRection DEXChange MODE cooooooccccicccncococcccnccconcnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnn rn n nn nr nn enne 6 46 L OiUlb ceCObb echon D NChauge Stiet 6 47 keeft ele ETC 6 48 SQURce FMEDE Viation E 6 49 SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling essi sessi nn 6 49 SOURce FM EXTernal DEViation eee iie isis sea sara rana ara rhn hahaha saa aa aA ARR 222 IA MAR non A A AR 244 6 50 ISQURCGe EM SENSIlivily o itr aiia D veia c DEP p CD ids 6 50 SOURce JFM SOURCO 2 dian ap ie e HD pL ER HER ead ne as 6 50 ISOURGCG FM
363. t recent messages are displayed at the top of the list When the button is pressed again the list of current messages is displayed Remote control command SYST ERR or STAT QUE Each time a SYSTem ERRor or STATus QUEue query is sent the oldest entry in the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared in the list 1411 4077 62 3 7 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display Block Diagram Display The block diagram shows provided options signal configuration and the currently selected signal flow of the generator with inputs and outputs used Signal generation can be completely operated from the block diagram A highlighted function block can be directly switched on and off with the toggle keys MOD ON OFF or RF ON OFF Clicking the rotary knob Enter opens the associated settings menu LF MOD Iv Iv Iv Function Blocks in the Block Diagram Each block represents a function of signal generation The function is indicated in the headline of the block e g Modulation In this block the modulation signals are set for instance In the check box Vion the respective function can be quickly activated e fe deactivated with the MOD ON OFF key After activation the block is displayed in blue Status information is displayed below the check box It is different for the different blocks In the Mod block for instance the selected modulation is indicated Clicking the rota
364. t result READ queries the measurement result of the sensor Response 45 6246576745440230 45 6 dBm were measured at the given frequency or e g for R amp S NRP Z81 Response 55 62403263352178 22 419472478812476 55 6 dbm is the measured average level 22 4 dBm is the measured peak level at the given frequency SENSe POWer CORRection SPDevice STATe ON OFF The command activates the use of the s parameters correction data of the power sensor Example SENS CORR SPD STAT ON activates the use of the s parameters correction data of the power sensor Dependencies For power sensor with attenuator this command is Device specific automatically set to ON 1411 4060 32 6 24 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SENSe POWer DISPlay PERManent STATe ON OFFFF The command switches on and off the permanent indication of the power measurement result in the upper right corner of the block diagram The type of sensor the connector the measurement source and if set the offset is indicated Example SENS POW DISP PERM STAT ON the permanent viewer is switched on SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth AUTO The command queries the current filter length for auto filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE AUTO The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS FILT TYPE AUTO selects auto filter mode for the power sensor connected to the SENSOR connector
365. t sweep is stopped The Extern Step sweep always starts at the start level The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control command SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW STEP 0 5 TRIG PSW SOUR EXT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger 4 76 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Sweep Mode Extern Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle that is Start Stop started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current level Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start level Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start level when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR EAUT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger Resets the sweep The start level is set and the next sweep starts Reset Sweep RF EE p Level Swee p Remote control command SWE RES ALL Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Execute Single Sweep Mode Single is selected RF Level Sweep
366. t taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Freq in header RF output frequency Freq in menu Freq offset Offset in menu Frequency offset by the instrument Offset in the Frequency menu Frequency at the output of the instrument Freq in the header area of the screen Mixer RF output frequency Frequency in the Frequency menu The frequency offset is entered in the Frequency menu Here it is also possible to set the frequency without taking the offset into consideration to set the step width for the frequency entry using the rotary knob and to set the phase for the RF output signal 1411 4060 32 4 40 E 1 R amp S SMC100A RF Signal RF Frequency Menu The Frequency menu is opened in the RF function block or using the SETUP key under RF Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep y Frequency and offset of the RF output signal is set in the upper part of the group menu The step width which is used when setting the frequency using the rotary knob with Variation Active On is set in the User Variation section Frequency 1 000 000 000 00 GHz y 0 000 000 00000 GHz User Variation Variation Active m Variation Step 1 000 000 00 MHz The lower parts concern the phase settings for the output signal and are described in the s
367. t the right of the value for list selection see next section To terminate the entry press one of the key combinations ALT F9 F10 F11 F12 or select unit in the field at the right of the value for list selection see next section Select unit in the field at the right of the value before entering the value for list selection see next section Changes a unit After the value entry has been terminated press a unit key or select unit in the field at the right of the value for list selection see next section After the value entry has been terminated press one of the key combinations ALT F9 F10 F11 F12 or select unit in the field at the right of the value for list selection see next section Select unit in the field at the right of the value after the value entry for list selection see next section 1411 4077 62 3 15 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Setting Parameters Selecting a Value from a List Setting Parameters The Y button next to the value field indicates that a selection list is available e Clicking the rotary knob Enter opens the list Selection is made by choosing an entry item is highlighted and confirmation with ENTER If the list is longer than the displayed window a scroll bar is available LF Frequency Sweep p Extern Single Extern Step Extern Start Stop Fun
368. tPOWe rTeTvee ELO srao CS SENSe POWer FREQuency lt frequency gt Hz Range depends on used sensor ENT EAT FT ENT Jorn ooo o y Csensaronensnome O A TT Csenserowensoue Jaor o o o sewstowepSTWeppEwap O onw Csensarowensverson A OO TT sewsromamees A O TT aseene A Liege 1411 4060 32 6 23 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A INITiate POWer CONTinuous ON OFF The command switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by the R amp S NRP Zxx power sensors on and off Switching the local state off enhances the measurement performance during remote control Example INIT CONT ON switches local state of continuous power measurement on READ POWer The command triggers the measurement with power sensors and provides the power measurement result of the selected power sensor The value is provided with the unit set with command SENSe UNIT POWer For certain power sensors e g R amp S NRP Z81 two values are returned first the value for the average level and separated by a comma the peak level Note The local state is not influenced by this commands measurements results can be retrieved with local state on or off For long measurement times it is recommended to use a SRQ MAV bit for command synchronization The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SENS UNIT DBM selects unit dBm for presentation of measuremen
369. te The commands of the SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem are not affected by an instrument reset RST Command Parameters Default unit SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 10 MHz az SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF Ee SS SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 4095 po SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal WEIS SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 10 MHz The command informs the instrument of the frequency of the external reference 10 MHz Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external source The reference must be input at the REF IN input ROSC EXT FREO 10 MHz informs the instrument that the external reference frequency is 10 MHZ SCPI Compliant SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF The command determines whether the calibrated OFF or a user defined ON adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency With STATe ON the instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the calibration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to OFF Example ROSC SOUR INT selects the internal source ROSC ADJ ON activates use of a user defined adjustment value ROSC ADJ VAL 1400 sets the adjustment value to 1400 SCPI Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 72 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALu
370. ted devices is not ready for data transfer NDAC Not Data Accepted active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions The following table lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument Table 8 1 IEC IEEE Bus Interface functions m eU CNN Handshake sink function acceptor handshake full capability 1411 4060 32 8 3 E 1 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMC100A IEC IEEE Bus Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active LOW They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC IEEE bus Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded 10 1F hex They affect all instruments connected to the bus without addressing Table 8 2 Universal Commands VISUAL BASIC command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear IBCMD controller CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 17 Locks switchover from
371. ted in the entry fields In the overwrite editing mode is used Numeric values can either be newly entered or the existing value can be varied Incorrect entries are cleared with the BACK SPACE key e Entering a new value A click on a numeric key activates the editing mode The previous value is cleared and the new value can be entered Dwell Time Dwell Time 10 0 ms e 6l ms e Variation Clicking the rotary knob Enter activates the editing mode Set the cursor to the left of the number to be changed using the left right arrow keys The value at the cursor position is varied An increase or decrease of the value depends on the cursor used up down or on the direction of rotation of the rotary knob Dwell Time 10 0 ms e 110 ms e m 3 o Alphanumeric values can be newly entered e g file name e New entry The entry is started by clicking an alphanumeric key File Name Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Enters a new value Press an alphanumeric key Press a letter key ora numeric key Edits a value Click the rotary knob Select the desired numeric digit with the rotary knob and mark it by clicking the button Change the number using the keypad Press the Enter key Select the desired numeric digit using the left right arrow keys Enter new value using the keyboard Click the desired position to set the cursor Change
372. tenuator Fixed Displays the level range in which the level is set without interruption Range In RF Level for the Attenuator Mode fixed setting Remote control commands OUTP AFIX RANG UPP OUTP AFIX RANG LOW If the level is set using the rotary knob the step width is defined in the User Variation section Variation Step RF Sets the user defined step width for entering the RF level using the Level rotary knob Level variation with this step width must also be activated with Variation Active Remote control command SOUR POW STEP INCR 1dBm Variation Active RF Activates the user defined step width used when varying the level Level value with the rotary knob ON The level value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user defined step width which is entered under Variation Step Remote control command SOUR POW STEP MODE USER OFF The level value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one unit at the cursor position standard operating mode Remote control command SOUR POW STEP MODE DEC Overvoltage Protection The overvoltage protection prevent overloading by an external signal applied to the RF output of the R amp S SMC Signal Generator The overload protection is tripped when the power of the external signal becomes too high A relay opens and interrupts the connection between the RF output and attenuator This condition is indicated in the display header by th
373. ter 1 section Remote control of signal Connecting the Se generator R amp S SMC to a Network Remote access to graphical user LAN chapter 8 interface of signal generator section LAN Connector and chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface 9 Oven controlled reference oscillator option R amp S SMC B1 1 CO OCXO See data sheet ES This option option R amp S SMC B1 0CXO generates a very precise 10 MHz reference signal It needs some minutes of warm up time to reach its nominal frequency 10 USB connectors type A USB See chapter 1 section USB universal serial bus interfaces Connecting an of type A host External Keyboard and Connection of peripherals such Mouse and chapter 8 as mouse and keyboard section USB Connection of memory stick for Connection USB and firmware update USB IN 11 USB interface type B USB IN See chapter 8 section USB universal serial bus interface of USB Connection type B device for remote control of USB and USB IN signal generator 1411 4077 62 1 10 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Putting into Operation Putting into Operation The following section describes the procedure for putting the instrument into operation It contains general safety instructions for instrument operation The installation of options and the firmware update are described in chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument on the CD ROM Unpacking the Instr
374. the value using the keyboard Varies a value Click the rotary knob Select the desired numeric digit with the rotary knob and mark it by clicking the button Vary the number using the rotary knob Press the Enter key Select the desired numeric digit using the left right arrow keys Vary the number using the up down arrow keys 1411 4077 62 3 14 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Setting Parameters Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters The entry of a numeric value can be terminated by pressing a unit key on the front panel selecting a unit in the selection field next to the value or by clicking the rotary knob Enter The unit is assigned in different ways Terminating the value entry by selecting a unit in the units field When the entry is terminated by selecting a unit in the units field next to the value the selected unit is assigned e g sym s for list selection see next section Dwell Time Mims ch Dwell Time 1 000 0 s Se Terminating the value entry with Enter If an entry is terminated by clicking the rotary knob Enter or with the s Y yields in the entry field next to the value is assigned in the example ksym s Dwell Time 10 ms 2 Dwell Time 10 0 ms ENTER yields ENTER key the unit displayed Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Assigns a unit To terminate the entry press one of the Unit keys or select unit in the field a
375. the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the STATus OPERation EVENt register SCPI Compliant 1411 4060 32 6 83 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A STATus OPERation CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Operation Condition register SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered e g the start of an adjustment Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVEN part SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register The
376. the individual menus where only the relevant type of file is available A button in the individual menu calls up the selection of the Select New and File Manager functions Select User Correction Data New User Correction Data File Manager After the Select New selection a File Select window for loading saving or creating a file is displayed see the following section File Select Menu page 3 23 After the File Manager selection a menu for managing all files is displayed see section File Manager page 3 24 The complete instrument settings are saved and loaded in the File menu which is called up by means of the File key see chapter 4 section Storing and Loading Instrument Data 1411 4077 62 3 22 E 1 RES SMC100A File Management File Select Menu The File Select menu consists of several areas File File recent data sets recent data sets var smc var smc 4 File Name Exclude Frequency Exclude Level y In the upper area Recent Data Sets the files last used are listed a maximum of ten files is displayed The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed above the windows Only the relevant files without file extensions are displayed If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed When a file is saved or created its name is
377. the new directory can be entered in the New Directory window The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level Remote control command MMEM MDIR var user test Note When the subdirectory is entered it is possible to enter an absolute path name e g var user meas or the path relative to the current directory e g MEAS Factory Preset Setup Setting The Factory Preset submenu provides a function to reset the instrument s settings to their factory state This function is activated by pressing the Execute Factory Preset button Note Since Factory Preset resets the remote channel and network settings to the default values executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to the instrument if these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones The Factory Preset function resets nearly all instrument settings In addition to the regular preset by means of the PRESET key a Factory Preset resets also the following values e Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator menu e Power on settings Level EMF menu e Network settings including hostname Setup menu e Remote Channel settings including IEC IEEE bus address and emulation Setup menu e Start Stop Gui Update Setup menu e Display and keyboard settings Setup menu 1411 4060 32 4 30 E 1 RES SMC100A Switching to Manual Control Local Key To maintain security password settings
378. the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times corresponding to the length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply If products without power switches are integrated in racks or systems a disconnecting device must be provided at the system level Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cable on a regular basis to ensure that it is in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by e g tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket Otherwise this can result in sparks fire and or injuries Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment compl
379. the same name already exists a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file 1411 4077 62 3 24 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Remote Access e Delete file Mark file and then press the Delete button softkey Prior to deletion a confirmation query is displayed which the user must confirm for this file to be deleted e Create new directory Mark drive or directory level where the new directory is to be created and then press the Create New Directory button softkey An entry window for entering the directory name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key Table 3 1 List of file extensions for user files the R amp S SMC assigns automatically List type Contents File suffix Instrument State Instrument settings savrcl User Correction User defined level correction values UCO Remote Access The R amp S SMC can be remote accessed from an external PC This allows convenient operation of the Signal Generator from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else Remote access in contrast to remote control does not use remote control commands but the regular user interface displayed using separate software which is installed on the external PC The instrument can thus be manually operated from the PC as on the unit itself Preconditions for remote access are a connection between signal generator and PC via a LAN network and the installation of the VNC client software on the PC a
380. ther by generating a blank file in the File Select menu see section File Management page 3 22 or by changing an existing list which will then be saved under a new name Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Call up editor Use the rotary knob or the Mark the Edit User Cor Click the Edit User Cor cursor keys to mark the Edit Data button in the Data button in the The cursor marks the first User Cor Data button in individual menu and press individual menu row of the Frequency Hz the individual menu click the the Enter key column rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter value Use the numeric keys to Use the numeric keys to enter the value and enter the value and terminate the entry by terminate the entry by pressing the unit key pressing the Enter key Change column Press the left right cursor Press the left right cursor Click cell keys keys Change row Use the rotary knob or the Use the up down cursor Click cell up down cursor keys to mark keys to mark the row the row 1411 4077 62 3 19 E 1 RES SMC100A Help System Function Front panel PC keyboard Mouse Select row Use the rotary knob or the Mark the GoTo button and Click cell The cursor moves to the selected row cursor keys to mark the GoTo button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the row index in the entry field by means of the numeric keys click the rotary kn
381. ting the R amp S SMC iesene 1 14 Switching Off indice hives deck heretic ae 1 14 Power FUS6S iis aii nea sil denen diane 1 15 Furiction Check A E 1 15 Default Settings ere ede et Oe ei br dd 1 16 Linux Operating System esera E aE EE 1 17 Connecting an External Keyboard and Mouse 1 17 Connecting the R amp S SMC to a Network LAN 1 18 Connection to the Network 1 18 Remote Access via an External Controller A 1 20 Configuration for Remote Access via UItr VNC eee 1 20 R amp S SMC100A Introduction Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation Introduction Putting into Operation Chapter 1 Putting into Operation explains the control elements and connectors of the R amp S SMC Signal Generator with the aid of the front and rear views and describes how to put the instrument into operation It also describes the connection of peripherals such as keyboard and mouse A detailed description of the device interfaces is given in chapter 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces The specifications of interfaces are described in the data sheet Chapter 2 Getting Started gives an overview of generator functions and introduces the operating concept Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in chapter 3 Manual Operation The complete manual is provided on the CD ROM in printable pdf format Menus and instrument functions are described in detail in chapter 4 Instrument Functions basics of remote co
382. tings section of the Setup menu see dentifying the R amp S SMC in the Network below The mode setting is Static Point to Point Connection To build a simple network just a LAN connection between the R amp S SMC and a controller without integration into a larger network an IP address has to be assigned to the R amp S SMC and the controller For such purposes the IP addresses 192 168 xxx yyy are available The value range for xxx and yyy is 1 254 the value for the subnet mask is always 255 255 255 0 The gateway IP address must also be provided however it is without relevance The mode setting is Peer To Peer Example On the PC 1 Open the TCP IP settings tab network connection in the control panel 2 Set fixed IP address deactivate DHCP 3 Select IP address 192 168 0 1 4 Select subnet mask 255 255 255 0 On the signal generator 1 Open the network setting panel in the Setup menu 2 Select IP address 192 168 0 2 3 Select subnet mask 255 255 255 0 4 Activate the setting For this type of connection a commercial cross over RJ 45 cable is used Identifying the R amp S SMC in the Network 1 Open the Setup menu by pressing the Setup key Click Network Settings menu in the Environment section 3 Select the IP address mode and enter the network data in the respective fields of the menu The data is provided by the network administrator The Computer name is indicated in the Hostname field The name can be changed
383. tion FM In case of selection Source Int the settings for the internal modulation sources are offered in the AM Source INTernal section of the Amplitude Modulation menu These settings affect all analog modulations which use the same modulation sources Amplitude Modulation AM Depth 30 0 d AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz y LF Gen Freq AM Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Frequency Modulation FM An internal or external source can be selected for frequency modulation A LF modulation generator is available as internal sources The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Note It is not possible to use frequency modulation simultaneously with phase modulation Frequency Modulation Menu The Frequency Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the SETUP key under Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation is switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all
384. tion FMOffset MEASure The command starts all adjustment for the FM PhiM modulator The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL FMOF starts the adjustments for the FM PhiM modulator Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully Device specific CALibration LEVel EXT DATA FACTory CUSTom Selects the data used for of external level correction By default the instrument uses correction data obtained in the factory before delivery In addition customer data can be used for external level correction The customer data is obtained using a R amp S NRP power sensor External level correction is a protected function See service manual chapter 2 Adjustment Example CAL LEV EXT DATA FACT selects the use of the data aquired at the factory for external level correction FACTory Device specific CALibration LEVel MEASure Performs all adjustments which affect the level The aquired correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL LEV starts the level adjustment in the mixer range Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic system contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing SCPI does not defi
385. tion is used to perform function tests e The Environment section is used to configure the controller interfaces e The Remote section is used to configure the remote control interfaces e The Protection is used to set the protection level for service functions e The Settings section contains the Save Recall menu Most submenus of this key can be accessed only via the SETUP key with the following exception e The Reference Oscillator submenu can also be called up in the RF block and is therefore described in the section on this block see section RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator page 4 44 System Reference Oscillator Internal Adjustments Hardware Config Start Stop Gui Update Software Options Install SW Option Test Test Point Selftest Check Front Panel Environment Date Time Network Settings Display Settings Remote GPIB Ethernet USB Protection Protection Security Settings Save Recall Factory Preset 1411 4060 32 4 8 E 1 R amp S SMC100A General Instrument Settings Internal Adjustments Setup System The R amp S SMC Signal Generator is extremely accurate thanks to the integrated procedures for adjustments Adjust All Adjust Synthesis Adjust Level Ext Level Adjustment Adjustment Data Customer d All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed
386. tment data missing 9 17 183 Adjustment data invalid 9 16 1411 4060 32 Index 2 200 Cannot access hardware 9 18 201 Hardware revision out of date 9 20 202 Cannot access the EEPROM 9 18 203 Command protected 9 7 203 Invalid EEPROM data 9 20 204 Driver initialization failed 9 19 221 Settings Conte 9 14 222 Data out of range sss 9 7 223 Too much data suus 9 15 224 Illegal parameter value 9 10 225 Out of memorn sss 9 12 226 Lists not same length 9 11 240 Hardware emor sss 9 9 241 Hardware mieeimg 9 9 241 No current ist 9 20 242 Unknown list type specified 9 21 3 300 Device specific emor usus 9 7 310 System emor 9 15 330 Self test failed ssssuuuss 9 14 350 Queue overflow susss 9 13 4 410 Query deadlocked 9 14 410 Query interrupted s 9 13 410 Query unterminated 9 13 460 Cannot open file sssusss 9 18 461 Cannot write file ss 9 19 462 Cannot read file 00aaanaeaanaaeeeaaeeeaa 9 18 463 Filename missing 9
387. tor 18 Inform controller about new address Sending the first command starts remote control operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC IEEE bus Manually gt Press the LOCAL key Notes Before the transition command processing must be completed as otherwise transition to remote control is performed immediately The LOCAL key can be disabled by the interface message amp LLO see Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is only possible via the IEC IEEE bus The LocAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN line of the IEC IEEE bus see Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generator Setinstrument to manual operation 1411 4060 32 5 3 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Switchover to Remote Control Remote Control via LAN Interface For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol Connection of the Signal Generator to a network and the querying of a computer name is described in section Connection to the Network Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller Instrument control is via the VXI 11 standard protocol Only the IP address or the computer name host name is required for
388. tput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 100 Hz LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl 20 ms 4 Determine the sweep mode LFOutput SWEep MODE AUTO 5 Determine the trigger TRIGger0 SOURce SINGle 6 Activate the sweep LFOutput FREQuency MODE SWEep 7 Trigger the sweep depending on the mode LFOutput SWEep EXECute 1411 4060 32 6 49 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A The keyword SOURce is optional and can be omitted SOURce LFOutput FREQuency SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz 1 MHz See data sheet SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz 1 MHz SOURce LFOutput F REQuency STOP 0 1 Hz 1 MHz H o SOURce LFOutput STATe ON OFF a SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELI SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute EEN p FISOUREEILFOupuRSWEeRIFREQUeneyISOURS irn Sage 7 STOP STAR Ee SOURce LFOutput SWEep F REQuency STEP LOGarithmic 001 50PCT Pct Page OV SOURce LFOutput SWEep F REQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP PY SOURce LFOutput LF Frequency SOURce LFOutput FREQuency 0 001 V 4 V The command sets the frequency of the LF signal for CW mode SOUR MODE CW mode The setting is valid for all analog modulations AM FM PhiM with internal modulation source and for the LF Output In Sweep mode SOUR LFO FREQ M
389. trol command SOUR LFO STAT ON Sets the output voltage of the LF output The entered value determines the peak voltage Remote control command SOUR LFO VOLT 1 V Sets the frequency of the LF generator This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal modulation source Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Pulse Generator Menu The Pulse Generator menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the SETUP key under Mod Gen The same settings can be made in the Pulse Modulation menu of the MOD block Please refer to the description of the menu in section Pulse Modulation page 4 88 Video Sync Signal State Pulse Generator 1411 4060 32 Switches on off the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector Pulse modulation of the RF carrier is activated in the Pulse modulation menu of the Modulation block Remote control command SOUR PGEN STAT ON 4 99 E 4 R amp S SMC100A Contents Remote Control Basics Contents Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 5 Remote Control BaSiCS oooooooocccccocccccccenecenenononononononenenenenos 5 1 Introduction Remote Control Basics 5 1 Getting Started 5 noa dt 5 2 Switchover to Remote Control 5 2 Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus e 5 3 Remote Control via LAN Interface 5 4 Remote Control via USB Interface 0 2 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaees 5 9 Interf
390. trument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table R amp S name SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate Auto mode SINGIe BUS Single mode EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command LFO SWEep MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As Soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGIe One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands LFOutput SWEep EXEC or TRG The mode has to be set to AUTO SOURce LFOutput SWEep MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTO The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on Example TRIG LSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector 1411 4060 32 6 100 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Command Description TRIGger FSWeep IMMediate The command immediately starts an RF frequency sweep cycle The command is only effective for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep FREQuency MOD
391. trument on 1411 4077 62 1 8 E 1 RES SMC100A Legend for Rear Panel View 2 Fuses ZC NM Fuses See chapter 1 section The R amp S SMC is fully fused by two RE ana N A fuses IEC127 T3 15H 250 V data sheet 3 IEEE 488 IEC IEEE bus connector IEC 625 IEEE 488 See data sheet and IEC bus IEEE 488 interface for chapter 8 section remote control of the R amp S SMC IEC IEEE Bus Interface 4 Output of pulse and video signal PULSE VIDEO See chapter 4 section Output of internal pulse generator Pulse Modulation signal or external pulse signal fed in via the PULSE EXT connector video signal 5 Input of external pulse signal Instrument triggering PULSE EXT See chapter 4 section Input of external pulse signal or input Pulse Modulation data of external trigger gate signal for sheet and chapter 4 internal pulse generator section Sweep Mode INST TRIG Input for external trigger for sweeps 6 Reference signal output REF OUT REF OUT See data sheet and Output of internal 10 MHz reference chapter 4 section RF 1 signal Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator 7 Reference signal input REF ING REF IN See data sheet and E Input for external 10 MHz reference chapter 4 section RF O signal Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator 1411 4077 62 1 9 E 1 Legend for Rear Panel View R amp S SMC100A 8 LAN interface LAN LAN See data sheet and Ethernet interface chap
392. ude Mod menu is the first menu item and is highlighted per default 1411 4077 62 2 5 E 1 Example of Setup R amp S SMC100A Press the rotary knob to open the Amplitude Modulation menu Amplitude Modulation State AM Source m H AM Depth 3o0 v d AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz D O 3 aja H GIS Select the AM Depth parameter by turning the rotary knob and then enter the desired AM depth with the aid of the numeric keypad and the unit keys Be o lt 3 BEE BEBE Amplitude Modulation State AM Source AM Depth AN Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz Finally switch on AM modulation by selecting State On and subsequently pressing the rotary knob Amplitude Modulation AM Source AM Depth AM Source we LFGen Freq 1 000 00 kHz To indicate the active state the Modulation block is displayed in blue The RF block is not yet active therefore no RF signal is output 1411 4077 62 2 6 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Step 3 Example of Setup Set frequency and level and activate the RF signal Press the FREQ key to activate the editing mode for frequency entry The frequency entry field in the header section of the display is highlighted Freq RF OFF 11 000 000 000 0 Ghz gt w GJ uy G9 uJ uj og daa 1 GJ 2 Gl Enter the frequency value of the desired RF carrier
393. uency and level otherwise the entries are lost Remote control command n a the list is automatically saved after the values have been entered Expands the menu with the area for import and export of user correction files Externally edited Excel tables with frequency level pairs can be imported as text or CSV files and used for user correction On the other hand internally created user correction list can be exported as text or CSV files Mode Import E ASCII File Settings Extension in BR Decimal Point Point y Column Separator Semicolon y Select ASCII Source None Select Destination None Import lt lt lt Hide Import Export Import Export UCOR Files Mode Export y ASCII File Settings Extension UX BR Decimal Point Pont y Column Separator Semicolon zj Select ASCII Destination None Select Source None Export 4 63 E 4 User Correction Mode User Correction Extension User Correction Decimal Point User Correction Column Separator User Correction Select ASCII Source Destination User Correction Destination Source User Correction Import Export User Correction 1411 4060 32 R amp S SMC100A Selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported The settings offered depend on the selected mode Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC MODE IMP Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Sele
394. ument e Remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items e First pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument s rear feet and then carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles on the front e Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument e Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover on the front that protects the instrument handles and remove it e Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage immediately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument In this case make sure not to discard the box and packing material It is advisable to keep the original packing material in order to prevent control elements and connectors from being damaged in case the instrument is to be transported or shipped at a later date Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19 Rack The instrument is designed for indoors use It can either be set up independently or mounted in a 19 rack A rack adapter refer to data sheet for Order No is required for installation in a 19 rack The mounting instructions are supplied with the adapter NOTICE Risk of overheating Insufficient airflow for cooling may cause overheating of the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation always check for space between the ventilation holes and the rack casing to get suffi
395. ument to the factory state can be performened manually in the Setup menu or with command SYSTem FPReset SAV number SAVE stores the current device state under the specified number see also RCL The command is used to store the current instrument state in an intermediate memory The instrument state can be recalled by using the command RCL with the associated number To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file command MMEMory STORe number file name extension is used Parameter file extension is savrcl Parameter number is the specific number defined with the SAV command e g SAV 4 SRE 0 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the specified value Bit 6 MSS enable bit remains 0 This command determines the conditions under which a service request is triggered The SRE query command reads out the content of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the content of the status byte in decimal form TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions which are waiting for a trigger event Specific trigger events can be triggered by means of the TRIGger command system sweep and lists TST SELF TEST QUERY triggers all self tests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument WAI WAIT to CONTINUE does not allow subsequent commands to be pro
396. unctions Most of the parameters are set in the menus Menus can be opened from the function blocks of the diagram either with the aid of the rotary knob Enter on the front panel or by a mouse click on the Config button An exception are the Setup and File menus In the Setup menu general settings are made which are not directly concerned with signal generation e g setting of the IEC IEEE bus address In the File menu files and lists are managed These menus can only be called with the SETUP keys Specific settings can also be made directly in the block diagram e g activating a function block by means of the toggle keys MOD ON OFF and RF ON OFF Changes affecting the signal flow are immediately visible in the graphics display Calling a Menu Setting Parameters After instrument switch on the cursor is always on the first function block of the diagram default setting It can be moved by means of the rotary knob or the arrow keys Clicking the rotary knob opens the menu associated with the function block The Menu button of the key emulation the opens the complete menu tree With the aid of the appropriate keys and softkeys the cursor can also be moved to the header area or the Winbar e The FREQ and LEVEL keys activate the frequency or level entry fields in the header area e The DiAGR key The DIAGR key toggles between block diagram magnif
397. upplied with the instrument The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde amp Schwarz service shop 1411 4060 32 4 11 E 4 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMC100A The Software Options menu under System is opened using the SETUP key Firmware SMC100A FW 02 05 155 beta Releas R amp S COMPASS 2 2 2 3 Release Hardware Options SMC B1 9 kHz to 3 2 GHz Software Options Internal GPIB Designation Ex Remote control commands OPT Response SMC B103 SMC K4 IDN Response Rohde amp Schwarz SMC 1411 4002k02 342988 2 02 0 0 Release The Firmware section of the menu shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform Note Your R amp S SMC is delivered with the latest firmware version available Firmware updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the download site of the Rohde amp Schwarz SMC home page http www rohde schwarz com product smc100a This home page always offers the latest information on your signal generator e g also on changes of the firmware update procedure The tables in the sections Hardware and Software list the installed hardware and software options Option Sh
398. urement source and if set the offset is indicated Remote control command SENS POW DISP PERM STAT ON 4 48 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Zero Power Sensors Source Power Sensors 1411 4060 32 Power Viewer Activates the auto zero function Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power For this purpose the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor see tips below R amp S power sensors automatically detect the presence of any significant input power This aborts zeroing and generates an error message Zeroing can take a few seconds depending on the sensor model refer tothe documentation of your external power sensor for more information Tips for zeroing Perform zeroing During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument After a substantial change of the ambient temperature After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature After several hours of operation When very low power signals are to be measured e g less than 10 dB above the lower measurement limit Switch off the RF power source for zeroing do not disconnect it from the power sensor In this way you will maintain the thermal equilibrium and zeroing will also compensate for the noise superimposed on the measured signal e g from a broadband amplifier Remote control command SENS POW ZERO Selects the source
399. us help functions support the user in signal configuration Context sensitive help for each parameter can be called with the HELP key Help Source Pulse Modulation Contents Index Back Previous Next 4 Instrument Functions gt Pulse Modulation gt Source Pulse Modulation Selects the source for the pulse modulation signal Pulse Generator Selects the internal pulse generator a Each help page is part of a comprehensive online help function which can be called by means of the Content Index Back Previous and Next links 1411 4077 62 3 3 E 1 R amp S SMC100A Display Messages indicate the current instrument state A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen With the aid of the INFO key help pages can be called for most of the messages They provide background information on the message and indicate operating steps that may be required All messages are explained in the online help which can be called with the HELP key Freq Level 1 000 000 000 0 crz 30 00 am gt ALC Auto Info Display The display shows the current signal generator state and offers graphical elements for direct operation It is divided into two sections e The frequency and level display with info line indicates the main output signal parameters and reports the current state w
400. which are required in mobile radio signal generation and modulation for EMC measurements of components test equipment for service and maintenance applications in research and apprenticeship e g at universities The instrument s main features are e high signal quality internal analog modulation modes AM FM PhiM pulse modulation frequency and level sweep remote control via USB LAN and IEC Bus The instrument is operated either by using it s own graphical user interface GUI in stand alone mode or remote controlled via an USB or a LAN interface Optionally for faster operation by remote control the instrument can be equipped with an IEC bus interface option R amp S SMC K4 The architecture of the R amp S SMC and the signal flow are shown in a block diagram on the R amp S SMC user interface In the diagram signal processing is performed from left to right left modulation generator right RF output The block diagram in the figure below shows the R amp S SMC Level Freq 363 000 000 00 we 11 00 4 z L Sweep ALC S amp H Info IV Iv Fig 2 1 Block diagram of R amp S SMC For signal generation the instrument is equipped with one of the frequency options R amp S SMC B101 9 kHz to 1 1 GHz R amp S SMC B103 9 kHz to 3 2 GHz For more detailed information on options refer to the R amp S SMC data sheet available on the R amp S SMC homepage on the internet http www rohde schwarz com product SMC 1 004A
401. width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 1096 of the previous frequency in each instance for a frequency sweep Resolution Correlation 0 01 PCT The value of SWE POIN is adjusted automatically Device specific SOURce SWEep POWer DWELI 2 ms 10s The command sets the time taken for each level step of the sweep Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF Example SWE POW DWEL 12 m sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a level sweep Device specific 1411 4060 32 6 79 E 1 Command Description R amp S SMC100A SOURce SWEep POWer EXECute The command triggers a sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep POWer MODE SINGle The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SWE POW MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the level sweep SWE POW EXEC triggers a level sweep SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the cycle mode of the level sweep Parameters AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each level step of the sweep is triggered individually either by varying the Current Level value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means
402. y shown when the output is deactivated An active sweep is also indicated in the block Modulation RF Modulation config ll config On On config Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator NRP Z Power Viewer Level EMF Automatic Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep x The CW and Sweep modes are available for generating the RF signal CW The RF signal is generated with the set frequency and level This is the default mode Sweep The RF signal is generated as a sweep with the set parameters Instruments connected downstream can be taken into consideration when setting the frequency and level by entering a frequency and or level offset 1411 4060 32 4 39 E 4 RF Signal RF R amp S SMC100A Automatic level control ensures maximum level accuracy User specific lists which contain level correction values for any frequency range User Correction can be created to for example compensate the cable attenuation in a test assembly setup The RF signal can be also generated in modulated form An internal LF generator internal pulse generator and or the external modulation inputs MOD EXT at the front and PULSE EXT at the back of the instrument are available as the source for the analog modulations An external trigger signal for the sweeps can be provided at the INST TRIG input The input REF IN is used to input an external instrument refe
403. y the center frequency of the output signal of RF output The second command is part of the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal of RF output If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz SOURce FM STATe ON This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the SOURce command system subsystem FM i e they have two common levels When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below SOURce FM The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows SOURCe FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz STATe ON However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz SOURce FM STATe ON 1411 4060 32 5 13 E 1 R amp S SMC100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly su
404. y with IEC 950 EN 60950 Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the PE terminal on site and the product s PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a license electrician Sheet 3 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Grouped Safety Messages For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that suitable protection is provided for users and products Do not insert any objects into the openings in the housing that are not designed for this purpose Never pour any liquids onto or into the housing This can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a thunderstorm can reach the product Otherwise the operating personnel will be endangered by electric shocks Rohde amp Schwarz products are not protected against penetration of liquids unless otherwise specified see also safety instruction 1 If this is not taken into account there exists the danger of electric

Manual - Test Equipment Depot

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents